Samsung Electronics Co SCX5635FN Multi Function Printer User Manual scx 5635 guide english
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Multi Function Printer scx 5635 guide english
Users Manual
SCX-5635 Series
Multi Functional Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.
To receive a more complete service, please
register your product at
www.samsung.com/global/register
Copyright_ 2
copyright
© 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Electronics Co., Ltd.
•PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
•PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
•UFST ´ and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
•TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
•All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
REV. 1.00
Content_ 3
COPYRIGHT
2
CONTENT
3
9 Safety information
13 Regulatory information
24 About this user’s guide
26 Features of your new product
INTRODUCTION
28
28 Machine overview
Front view
Rear view
30 Control panel overview
31 Understanding the Status LED
31 Introducing the useful buttons
Power Saver button
Menu button
GETTING STARTED
32
32 Setting up the hardware
32 Supplied software
33 System requirements
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
34 Installing USB connected machine’s driver
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
36 Sharing your machine locally
Windows
Macintosh
NETWORK SETUP
38
38 Network environment
38 Introducing useful network programs
SyncThru™ Web Service
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
SetIP
38 Using a wired network
Printing Configuration report
Setting IP address
Network parameter setting
Installing wired network connected machine’s driver
42 Using a wireless network
Wireless network environments
Printing Network Configuration Report
Setting IP address
Network parameter setting
Restoring factory default settings
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Installing wireless network connected machine’s driver
Macintosh
content
Content_ 4
BASIC SETUP
49
49 Altitude adjustment
49 Changing the display language
49 Setting the date and time
49 Changing the clock mode
50 Changing the default mode
50 Setting sounds
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound
Speaker volume
50 Entering characters using the number keypad
Entering alphanumeric characters
Keypad letters and numbers
Correcting numbers or names
Inserting a pause
51 Using the save modes
Using toner saving feature
Using power saving feature
Using scan power saving feature
51 Setting the default tray and paper
In the control panel
In the computer
52 Changing the font setting
52 Setting job timeout
52 Auto continue
52 Auto tray switch
MEDIA AND TRAY
53
53 Preparing originals
53 Loading originals
On the scanner glass
In the document feeder
54 Selecting print media
Guidelines to select the print media
Media sizes supported in each mode
55 Changing the tray size
55 Loading paper in the tray
Tray 1 / optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
57 Printing on special media
Envelope
Transparency
Labels
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
Preprinted paper
59 Setting the paper size and type
Setting the paper size
Setting the paper type
Setting the paper source
59 selecting an output location
Printing to the output tray
PRINTING
60
60 Printer driver features
PCL Printer driver
PostScript Printer driver
60 Basic printing
Canceling a print job
61 Opening printing preferences
Content_ 5
Using a favorite setting
62 Using help
62 Using special print features
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Printing posters
Printing booklets
Printing on both sides of paper
Change percentage of your document
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
Using watermarks
Using overlay
64 Changing the default print settings
65 Setting your machine as a default machine
65 Printing to a file (PRN)
65 Macintosh printing
Printing a document
Changing printer settings
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Printing on both sides of paper
67 Linux printing
Printing from applications
Printing files
Configuring Printer Properties
68 Printing with PS driver
Understanding PS driver’s Printing Preferences
COPYING
70
70 Basic copy
70 Changing the settings for each copy
Changing the darkness
Selecting the type of originals
Reducing or enlarging copies
71 Changing the default copy settings
71 Using special copy features
ID card copying
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
Poster copying
Clone copying
72 Copying on both sides of originals
72 Deciding the form of copy output
72 Setting copy timeout
SCANNING
73
73 Basic scanning method
73 Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
Setting up an email account
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment
Storing email addresses
75 Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)
For USB connected machine
For network connected machine
75 Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to server)
Setting up an FTP server
Setting up an SMB server
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
76 Setting authentication for authorized user
Registering local authorized users
Content_ 6
76 Using Samsung Scan Manager
Set Scan Button tab
Change Port tab
77 Changing the scan feature settings
77 Changing the default scan settings
78 Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
78 Scanning using the WIA driver
Windows XP
Windows Vista
78 Macintosh scanning
Scanning with USB
Scanning with network
79 Linux Scanning
Scanning
Adding Job Type Settings
Using the Image Manager
FAXING
81
81 Preparing to fax
81 Sending a fax
Setting the fax header
Sending a fax
Sending a fax manually
Confirming a transmission
Automatic redialing
Redialing the last number
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
Delaying a fax transmission
Sending a priority fax
83 Receiving a fax
Changing the receive modes
Receiving manually in Tel mode
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Activating secure receiving mode
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper
Receiving faxes in memory
85 Adjusting the document settings
Resolution
Darkness
85 Forwarding a fax to other destination
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a server
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server
86 Setting up address book
Speed dial numbers
Group dial numbers
Searching Address Book for an entry
88 Printing sent fax report automatically
Content_ 7
USING USB MEMORY DEVICE
89
89 About USB memory device
89 Scanning to an USB memory device
Scanning
Customizing Scan to USB
90 Printing from a USB memory device
90 backing up data
Backing up data
Restoring data
90 managing usb memory
Deleting an image file
Formatting a USB memory device
Viewing the USB memory status
MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED FEATURE
92
92 Fax setup
Changing the fax setup options
Sending
Receiving
Change Default
Auto Report
93 Copy setup
Changing the copy setup options
Duplex Print
Change Default
94 Scan setup
Changing the scan setup options
94 Printing a report
94 Clearing memory
95 Network
96 Menu overview
MANAGEMENT TOOLS
99
99 Introducing useful management tools
99 Using SyncThru™ Web Service
To access SyncThru™Web Service:
SyncThru™Web Service overview
E-mail Notification Setup
Setting the contact information
100 Using the Smart Panel program
Understanding Smart Panel
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings
101 Smarthru Office
Starting SmarThru Office
Using SmarThru Office
102 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
Printers configuration
Scanners configuration
Ports configuration
MAINTENANCE
105
105 Printing a machine report
105 Finding the serial number
105 Cleaning a machine
Cleaning the outside
Cleaning the inside
Cleaning the scan unit
106 Storing the toner cartridge
Content_ 8
Expected cartridge life
106 Tips for moving & storing your machine
TROUBLESHOOTING
107
107 Redistributing toner
107 Clearing original document jams
108 Tips for avoiding paper curls
108 Tips for avoiding paper jams
109 Clearing paper jams
In tray 1
In optional tray 2
In the multi-purpose tray
Inside the machine
In exit area
In the duplex unit area
112 Understanding display messages
Checking display messages
115 Solving other problems
Paper feeding problems
Printing problems
Printing quality problems
Copying problems
Scanning problems
Fax problems
Samsung Scan Manager Problem
Common PostScript problems
Common Windows problems
Common Linux problems
Common Macintosh problems
SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
124
124 How to purchase
124 Available supplies
124 Available accessories
124 Available maintenance parts
125 Replacing the toner cartridge
125 Necessary precautions to take when installing accessories
125 Upgrading a memory module
Installing a memory module
Activating the added accessories in PS printer properties
126 Installing a wireless network interface card
Installing a wireless network interface card
127 Checking replaceable’s lifespan
127 Replacing the document feeder rubber pad
SPECIFICATIONS
129
129 General specifications
130 Printer specifications
131 Scanner specifications
131 Copier specifications
132 Facsimile specifications
133 Print media specifications
CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
134
Safety information_ 9
safety information
These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any
potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and
instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place
for future reference.
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of
danger.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Warning
Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not disassemble.
Do not touch.
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
Follow directions explicitly.
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the
electrical outlet is not grounded.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power
cord.
Ź Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be
crushed by a heavy object could result in electric
shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,
small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarrettes,
etc.).
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not
handle the plug with wet hands.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
Safety information_ 10
Caution
OPERATING METHOD
Caution
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,
makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,
immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the
machine.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
During an electrical storm or for a period of
non-operation,remove the power plug from the
electrical outlet.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
Ź Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this
could result in electric shock.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Ź Burns could occur.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections
and request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Ź Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire..
If the machine does not operate properly after these
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from qualified
service personnel.
Ź Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in
performance, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Ź Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
Ź It can cause damage to the machine.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children
to touch.
Ź You may be burned.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine
and paper tray.
Ź You may get injured.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers
or sharp metal objects.
Ź It can cause damage to the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
Ź This could result in elevated component temperatures which
can cause damage or fire.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output
tray.
Ź It could cause damage to the machine.
Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing
jammed paper.
Ź You may get hurt.
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.
Ź To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from
the electrical outlet.
Safety information_ 11
INSTALLATION / MOVING
Warning
Caution
MAINTENANCE / CHECKING
Caution
Do not place the machine in an area with dust,
humidity or water leaks.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
When moving the machine, turn the power off and
disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at
least two people.
Ź The machine could fall, causing human injury or
machine damage.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
Ź If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
Ź The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine
damage.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Ź Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
Ź If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are
using, contact the electrical utility company.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
Ź This can diminish performance, and could result in electric
shock or fire.
Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if
necessary.
Ź Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters
(79”) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG
or larger.
Ź Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could
result in electric shock or fire.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the
machine with benzene, paint thinner or achol; do not
spray water directly into the machine.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
Ź Children may get hurt.
When you are working inside the machine replacing
supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the
machine.
Ź You may get injured.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by
yourself.
Ź It can cause damage to the machine. Call a
certified technician when the machine needs repair.
Safety information_ 12
SUPPLY USAGE
Caution
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
Ź This could result in electric shock or fire.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's
guide provided with the machine.
Ź Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Ź The machine should only be repaired by Samsung service
technician.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Ź Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep
them away from children..
Ź Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner
cartridge or fuser unit.
Ź It can cause an explosion or fire.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to
the machine.
Ź In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a
service fee will be charged.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Ź Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.
Regulatory information_ 13
regulatory information
This machine is designed for our sound environment and certified with several regulatory statements.
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
TAIWAN ONLY
OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.
Regulatory information_ 14
MERCURY SAFETY
PERCHLORATE WARNING
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in
California USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)
POWER SAVER
RECYCLING
CHINA ONLY
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
Regulatory information_ 15
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference, and
•This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of
wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed
with other commercial wastes for disposal.
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your
local, free battery return system.
Regulatory information_ 16
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the
presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system
label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the
body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by
the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW/cm2 may be
exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at
all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
RFID (RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFACE DEVICE)
RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. (U.S.A., France, Taiwan only)
TAIWAN ONLY
Regulatory information_ 17
RUSSIA ONLY
AE95
AE95
FAX BRANDING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission the following information:
1. the date and time of transmission
2. identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and
3. telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require
modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the
machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease
service, providing that they:
a) promptly notify the customer.
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
•Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
•If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and
Regulatory information_ 18
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with
your machine.
•If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.
•When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency
number.
•This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
•This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal
13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
•Green and Yellow: Earth
•Blue: Neutral
•Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable
93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
Regulatory information_ 19
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
European Radio Approval Information(for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified
Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the
European Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European States qualified under wireless approvals:
European States with restrictions on use:
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS
Wireless Guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The
wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If
the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices
are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this
time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken
to minimize human contact during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body
(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are
on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require
wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.
EU Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain,
Sweden and the U.K.
EEA/EFTA
countries
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland
EU In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as
wireless
In Italiy, if used outside of own premises, general authorization is required
In Russian, only for indoor applications
EEA/EFTA
countries
No limitations at this time.
Regulatory information_ 20
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where
use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when
traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions
on the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and
shields are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's,
and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Regulatory information_ 21
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.
Regulatory information_ 22
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Regulatory information_ 23
CHINA ONLY
About this user’s guide_ 24
about this user’s guide
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each
step during actual usage. Valuable for both novice and professional users can refer to this as a guide for installing and
using the machine.
• Read the safety information before using the machine.
• If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See "Troubleshooting" on page 107.)
• Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See "Glossary" on page 136.)
• Use Index to find information.
• All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
• The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.
CONVENTION
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•Document is synonymous with original.
•Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
•Machine refers to printer or MFP.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
The date format may differ from country
to country.
Do not touch the green underside of the
toner cartridge.
CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE
Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Start
Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function
and feature.
Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical
damage or malfunction.
Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute
(“Cross-reference”) Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information. (See Finding more information.)
About this user’s guide_ 25
FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen.
MATERIAL NAME DESCRIPTION
Quick Install Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the
machine.
Online User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining
your machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.
Network Website You can set the network environment from your computer using network-managing programs, such as SetIP, SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service, etc.This Website will be convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously. You can
download the SyncThru™ Web Admin Service on http://solution.samsungprinter.com. SetIP program is provided in the software CD.
Driver Help This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing.G(See "Using help"
on page 62.)
Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsungprinter.com.
Features of your new product_ 26
features of your new product
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Print with excellent quality and speed
Handle many different types of printable material
Create professional documents
Save time and money
Expand your machine’s capacity
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3
136 PS3 fonts
•You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi effective
output.
•Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 33 ppm and
letter-sized paper at up to 35 ppm.
•For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at
up to 17 ipm and letter-sized paper at up to 18 ipm.
•The multi-purpose tray supports envelopes, labels,
custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The
multi-purpose tray holds up to 50 sheets of plain paper.
•The 250-sheet tray 1 and 250-sheet optional tray support
plain paper in various sizes.
•Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with
words, such as “Confidential”. (See "Using watermarks" on
page 63.)
•Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See
"Printing posters" on page 62.)
•You can use preprinted forms with plain paper. (See"Using
overlay" on page 64.)
•To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single
sheet of paper. (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 62.)
•This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
•To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
(double-sided printing). (See "Printing on both sides of
paper" on page 62.)
•Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their
memory. (See "Available accessories" on page 124.)
•Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3 (PS)
enables PS printing.
Print in various environments
Copy originals in several formats
Scan the originals and send it right away
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax
Use USB flash memory devices
©Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.
Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are trademarks
of Zoran Corporation.
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.
•You can print with various operating system such as
Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems. (See "System
requirements" on page 33.)
•Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a
network interface.
•Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the
original document on a single page. (See "2-up or 4-up
copying (N-up)" on page 71.)
•The print quality and image size may be adjusted and
enhance at the same time.
•Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,
TIFF and PDF formats.
•Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using
Networks scanning. (See "Sending a scanned image to
several destinations as an email attachment" on page 74.)
•You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also
send the fax to several stored destinations.
•After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax
reports according to the setting.
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various
ways with your machine.
•You can scan documents and save them to the device.
•You can directly print data stored to the device.
Features of your new product_ 27
FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries.
Features by models include:
(Ɣ: Included, ż: Optional, Blank: Not available)
FEATURES SCX-5635FN SCX-5635HN
USB 2.0 ƔƔ
USB Memory Interface ƔƔ
Document Feeder ƔƔ
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN ƔƔ
Network Interface 802.11 b/g wireless LAN ż
Duplex (2-sided) printing ƔƔ
FAX ƔƔ
Handset Ɣ
Introduction_ 28
1.introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes:
•Machine overview
•Control panel overview
•Understanding the Status LED
•Introducing the useful buttons
MACHINE OVERVIEW
Front view
112
213
314
415
516
617
718
819
920
10 21
11 22
Document feeder cover Front door
Document feeder width
guides Document output tray
Document feeder input tray USB memory port
Document feeder output tray Control panel
Front door handle Toner cartridge
Multi-purpose tray handle Multi-purpose tray extension
Handle Multi-purpose tray paper
width guides
Paper level indicator Scanner lid
Optional tray 2aScanner glass
Tray 1 Handsetb
Multi-purpose tray Scanner lock switch
a. Optional device.
b.SCX-5635HN only.
Introduction_ 29
Rear view
1Network port 7Duplex unit
2USB port 8Rear door
3USB host port 9Power receptacle
4Optional tray 2 cable
connector 10 Power-switch
5Telephone line socket 11 Control board cover
6Extension telephone socket
(EXT)
Introduction_ 30
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW
1ID Copy You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper. (See "ID card copying" on page 71.)
2Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stores on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on your
machine. (See "About USB memory device" on page 89.)
3Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
4Status Shows the status of your machine. (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 31.)
5Fax Activates Fax mode.
6Copy Activates Copy mode.
7Scan/Email Activates Scan mode.
8OK Confirms the selection on the screen.
9Arrow Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.
10 Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus. (See "Machine status and advanced feature" on page 92.)
11 Back Sends you back to the upper menu level.
12 Numeric keypad Dials fax number, and enters the number value for document copies or other options.
13 Address Book Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers and email addresses or search for stored fax numbers or email addresses.
14 Redial/Pause In standby mode, redials the last number. Also in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.
15 On Hook Dial Performs same as you hold a handset under the telephone line is engaged.
16 Stop/Clear Stops an operation at any time. The pop-up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or
resume.
17 Power Saver Sends the machine into power saver mode. You can also turn the power on and off with this button. (See "Power Saver
button" on page 31.)
18 Start Starts a job.
Introduction_ 31
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in
the message or refer to troubleshooting part. (See "Understanding
display messages" on page 112.) If the problem persists, call for
service.
INTRODUCING THE USEFUL BUTTONS
Power Saver button
When the machine is not in use, save electricity by pressing the Power
Saver button. (See "Using power saving feature" on page 51.)
Menu button
When you want to know the machine status and set your machine to use an
advanced feature, click Menu button. (See "Machine status and advanced
feature" on page 92.)
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off •The machine is off-line.
•The machine is in power saver mode. When
data is received, or any button is pressed, it
switches to on-line automatically.
Green Blinking •When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine
is receiving data from the computer.
•When the backlight blinks rapidly, the
machine is printing data.
On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Red Blinking •A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is
cleared, the machine resumes.
•The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge. You can
temporarily improve print quality by
redistributing the toner. (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 125, "Redistributing
toner" on page 107.)
On •The toner cartridge is empty. Remove the old
toner cartridge and install a new one. (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 125.)
•Apaper jam has occurred. (See "Clearing
paper jams" on page 109.)
•The cover is opened. Close the cover.
•There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in
the tray.
•The machine has stopped due to a major
error. Check the display message. (See
"Understanding display messages" on
page 112.)
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off The machine is not in the power save mode.
On The machine is in the power save mode.
Getting started_ 32
2.getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
•Setting up the hardware
•Supplied software
•System requirements
•Installing USB connected machine’s driver
•Sharing your machine locally
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the
Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and
follow the steps below:
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,500 m (4,921 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing. (See "Altitude adjustment" on
page 49.)
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
affected.
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3. Remove tape holding the machine securely.
4. Install the toner cartridge.
5. Load paper. (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 55.)
6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on.
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer., you
must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD . The
software CD provides you with the following software.
Getting started_ 33
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:
Windows
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
• Users who have an administrator right can install the software.
•Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine.
Macintosh
OS CONTENTS
Windows •Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
•PostScript Printer Driver: Use the PostScript driver
to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in
the PS language.
•Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning
documents on your machine.
•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
•SmarThru Officea:This program is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional
machine.
•Samsung Scan Manager: You can find out about
Scan Manager program information and installed scan
driver's condition.
•SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses.
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open
another image editor program, such as Adobe Photoshop, from
SmarThru Office . For details, refer to the on screen help supplied on
the SmarThru Office program. (See "Smarthru Office" on page 101.)
Macintosh •PostScript Printer Driver: Use this file to run your
machine from a Macintosh computer and print
documents.
•Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for
scanning documents on your machine.
•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
• Scan Manager: You can find out about Scan
Manager program information and installed scan
driver's condition.
•SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses.
Linux •Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your machine’s features.
• Printer Description (PPD) file: Use this file to run
your machine from a Linux computer and print
documents.
•SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
•SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses.
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM FREE HDD
SPACE
Windows
2000
Pentium II 400 MHz
(Pentium III 933 MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows
Server 2003
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1.25 GB to
2 GB
Windows
Vista
Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB
(1024 MB)
15 GB
Windows
Server 2008
Pentium IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2048 MB)
10 GB
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM FREE HDD
SPACE
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4
•Intel
Processors
•PowerPC G4/
G5
•128 MB for a
PowerPC based
Mac (512 MB)
•512 MB for a
Intel-based Mac
(1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X
10.5
•Intel
Processors
•867 MHz or
faster Power
PC G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Getting started_ 34
Linux
• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for
working with large scanned images.
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at
maximum.
INSTALLING USB CONNECTED MACHINE’S
DRIVER
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your
computer using the USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network,
skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected
machine’s driver. (See "Installing wired network connected machine’s
driver" on page 40.)
Selecting Custom installation allows you to choose programs to
install.
Only use an USB cable no longer then 3m (118 inch. ). Data might not
be transferred to your machine.
Windows
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.
The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a
machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for
machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the
installation procedure, click in the upper right corner of the box
to close the window, or click Cancel.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
appear.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All programs > Accessories
>Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the
User Account Control windows.
3. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. and then click Next.
If your machine is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.
• After connecting the machine, click Next.
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Operating
system
RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32bit)
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64bit)
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)
RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2GB)
Getting started_ 35
• If you don’t want to connect the machine at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. The installation will then
start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the machine and interface in use.
5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click
Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip.
6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from
Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now registered
to the Samsung web site.
8. Otherwise, just click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
For windows follow the steps below to uninstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > your
printer driver name > Maintenance.
c) Select Remove and click Next.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item
individually.
d) Select the components you want to remove and then click Next.
e) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click Yes.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from
your computer.
f) After the software is removed, click Finish.
If you want to reinstall the driver over the currently installed driver via
the provided CD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM then, the window with
overwriting confirmation message appears. Simply confirm it to
proceed to the next step. Next steps are same as the first installation
you have made.
Macintosh
The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the Driver
files that allows you to use the CUPS driver or PostScript driver (only
available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for
printing on a Macintosh computer.
Also, it provides you with the TWAIN driver for scanning on a Macintosh
computer.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install.Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
12. Click Add on the Printer List.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, press the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.
•For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB
connection.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, click Default and find the USB connection.
14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
15. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e) Double-click the Installer icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
i) When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
j) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the
driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will automatically be installed as
well.
The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver
package for using your machine with a Linux computer easily in UI
based management tool.(See "Using the Linux Unified Driver
Configurator" on page 102.)
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in ˈrootˉ in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Getting started_ 36
The software CD will run automatically.
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the
bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type inGthe
following:
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is
/mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh
If you still failed to run the software CD , type the followings in sequence:
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun
software package installed and configured.
4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
5. When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop
icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience.
If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available
through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver
package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or
Image Manager.
Installing the driver in the text mode:
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to
install the driver, you have to use the driver in the text mode.
• Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]#
./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the terminal screen. The
installation is completed.
• When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation
instructions above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh
on the terminal screen.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in
the Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver.
If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
c) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
The software CD will run automatically.
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at
the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears,
type in:
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount
is /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun
software package installed and configured.
d) Click Uninstall.
e) Click Next.
f) Click Finish.
SHARING YOUR MACHINE LOCALLY
Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine
locally.
If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable
and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer
connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the
host computer to print.
Windows
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 34.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings >Printers.
•For Windows XP/2003 select Printer and Faxes.
•For Windows Vista select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound >Printers.
4. Double-click your printer driver icon.
5. From the Printer menu, select Sharing....
6. Check the Share this printer.
7. Fill in the Shared Name field. Click OK.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 34.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. Select All programs > Accessories >Window Explorer.
1Host computer A computer which is directly connected to
the machine by USB cable.
2Client computers Computers which use the machine shared
through the host computer.
Getting started_ 37
4. Enter in IP address of the host computer and press Enter in your
keyboard.
In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill
in User ID and password of the host computer account.
5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.
6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK.
7. Open the file you want to print and start printing.
Macintosh
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5. Refer to Mac Help for
other OS versions.
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Macintosh" on page 35S"Macintosh"
on page 41.)
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click
Print & Fax.
3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list.
4. Select “Share this printer”.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 34.)
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click
Print & Fax.
3. Press the “+” icon.
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.
4. Select your machine and click Add.
Network setup_ 38
3.network setup
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
•Network environment
•Introducing useful network programs
•Using a wired network
•Using a wireless network
NETWORK ENVIRONMENT
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the
machine's control panel.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine:
INTRODUCING USEFUL NETWORK PROGRAMS
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
SyncThru™ Web Service
Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to:
•Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect
to various network environments.
•Customize machine settings.
(See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 99.)
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot
network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download
this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. (See "IP setting
using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 39 or "IP setting using SetIP
Program (Macintosh)" on page 39)
USING A WIRED NETWORK
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your
network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished.
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding
port on your machine.
Printing Configuration report
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reports and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network Info. and press OK.
5. Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm printing.
Network Configuration Report will then be printed out.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
•MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78
•IP Address : 192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server) located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.
•DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Network interface •Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
•802.11 b/g Wireless LAN (Optional)
Network operating system •Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista
•Various Linux OS
•Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5
Network protocols •TCP/IP
•Standard TCP/IP
•HTTP
•DHCP
•SNMP
•BOOTP
•LDAP
•SMTP
Network setup_ 39
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report.
•Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also
change IP address using the machine's control panel.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using control panel
1. Connect your machine to the network with an network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. Press Menu on the control panel.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight TCP/IP and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Static and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight IP Address and press OK.
8. Enter the IP address using numeric keypad and press OK.
9. Enter other parameters, such as the Subnet Mask and Gateway
and press OK.
10. After entering all parameters, press Stop/Clear to return to ready
mode.
Now go to "Installing wired network connected machine’s driver" on
page 40.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Double click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer and open the X drive.
(X represents your CD-ROM drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Network Printer Utilities > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows:
•MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s
network interface and can be found in the Network
Configuration Report.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
•Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.
•Default Gateway:Enter ta new Gateway for your machine.
6. Click Apply,and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary for your model.
1. Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.
2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window. Open the
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3. Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon,
which is the second icon from the left in the application menu bar. A
TCP/IP Configuration window will open.
If the printer was not shown in the information row, select the
Manual Setting icon (third from left) to open the TCP/IP
Configuration window.
5. Enter the printer’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
Network setup_ 40
The printer’s MAC address is the hardware serial number of
the on-board network interface and can be found on the
Network Configuration Report.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
•Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.
•Default Gateway: Enter ta new Gateway for your machine.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network
administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Installing wired network connected machine’s driver
You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software
includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. All
applications should be closed on your computer before beginning
installation.
Windows
The following procedure is based on Windows XP. The procedure
and popup window which appears during the installation may differ
depending on the operating system, machine features, or the
interface in use.
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. The
software CD should automatically run and an installation window
appear.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in
the User Account Control windows.
3. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4. Select Typical installation for a network printerGand then click
Next.
If your printer is not connected to the network, the following
window will appear. Select a setup option you want, click Next.
Then the Set IP Address window appears. Do as follows:
a) Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the
list.
b) Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the
printer manually and click ConfigureGto set the specific IP
address for the network printer.
c) Click Next, and go to step 6.
d) You can also set the network printer via SyncThru Web
Service, an embedded web server. Click Launch SWS on
Set IP Address windows. Your machine’s embedded
website opens.
Network setup_ 41
5. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the
machine you want to install from the list and then click Next.
• If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
machine to the network. To add the machine to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
machine. To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC
address, print a Network Configuration page.
• To find a shared machine (UNC Path), select Shared
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find
a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
• If you cannot find your machine in network,turn off the
firewall and click Update. For Windows operating system,
click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and
inactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to
its on-line guide.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox
and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now
registered to the Samsung web site.
9. Otherwise, just click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
For windows follow the steps below to uninstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > your
printer driver name > Maintenance.
c) Select Remove and click Next.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item
individually.
d) Select the components you want to remove and then click Next.
e) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click
Yes.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from
your computer.
f) After the software is removed, click Finish.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install.Easy Install is recommended
for most users. All components necessary for machine operations
will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components
to install.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
10. Select Typical installation for a network print and click OK.
The certification window appears, click Trust. See "IP setting
using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 39.
11. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.
12. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
13. Click Add on the Printer List.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, press the “+” icon; a display window will pop
up.
14. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, click IP.
15. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type
option.
16. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.
17. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot
determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the
default queue first.
18. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model
Name.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,
choose Select a driver to use... and your machine name in
Print Using.
Your machine’s IP address appears on the Printer List, and is set
as the default machine.
19. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
Network setup_ 42
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e) Double-click the Installer icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
i) When the message which warns that all applications will close
on your computer appears, click Continue.
j) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop.
4. Double-click the Linux folder.
5. Double-click the install.sh icon.
6. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
8. Select Network printer and click Search button.
9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
10. Select your machine and click Next.
USING A WIRELESS NETWORK
If you have installed a optional wireless network card, you must set up the
network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter
will show you how this is easily accomplished.
Before starting, please locate the crossover network cable and the Printer
Software Installation CD-ROM provided with your machine (;printer). You
may need to contact a network administrator or the person that set up your
wireless network for information regarding the configuration.
If you are already aware of your machine’s IP address configured and this
IP address is available, you may go to configuring the machine’s wireless
network directly. (See "Configuring the machine’s wireless network" on
page 44.)
Wireless network environments
Infrastructure mode
An Infrastructure mode network is the most common wireless network
configuration in a home or office consisting of a wireless router, or an
access point, that connects all the computers and other networked
devices into a common local area network (LAN).
Ad-hoc mode
An Ad-hoc mode network provides peer to peer communication. In an
Ad-hoc mode network, wireless devices and computers communicate
directly with each other, without using an access point.
Printing Network Configuration Report
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reports and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network Info. and press OK.
5. Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm printing.
Network Configuration Report will then be printed out.
Please review your machines User’s Guide to learn of additional details.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
•MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78
•IP Address : 192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server) located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate intranets for security reasons.
•DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
Network setup_ 43
report.
•Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also
change IP address using the machine's control panel.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using control panel
1. Connect your machine to the network with an RJ-45 Ethernet cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. Press Menu on the control panel.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight TCP/IP and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Static and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight IP Address and press OK.
8. Enter the IP address using numeric keypad and press OK.
9. Enter other parameters, such as the Subnet Mask and Gateway
and press OK.
10. After entering all parameters, press Stop/Clear to return to ready
mode.
Now go to "Installing wireless network connected machine’s driver" on
page 46.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• You only need to run this program if your network requires a
static IP address. Otherwise, you may proceed to the
configuring the machine’s wireless network of this
document. If you are unsure of this requirement ask the system
administrator or the person who has set up your local network.
(See "Configuring the machine’s wireless network" on
page 44.)
• You can only use the SetIP program when your machine is
connected to a network or directly connected to a computer
with the crossover network cable included with your machine.
In most cases we recommend using the crossover cable. You
will be asked to connect this cable in a moment.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Double click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer and open the X drive.
(X represents your CD-ROM drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine and the computer using crossover network
cable.
2. Temporarily disable the computer firewall before continuing by doing
the following:
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Network Printer Utilities > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows:
•MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s
network interface and can be found in the Network
Configuration Report.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine. For
example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter
192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the
computer’s address.)
•Subnet Mask: Enter this exactly the same as the computer’s
Subnet Mask.
•Default Gateway: Enter this exactly the same as the computer’s
Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply,and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary for your model.
Network setup_ 44
1. Connect the crossover network cable between the printer and the
Macintosh.
2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window. Open the
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3. Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon,
which is the second icon from the left in the application menu bar. A
TCP/IP Configuration window will open.
If the printer was not shown in the information row, select the
Manual Setting icon (third from left) to open the TCP/IP
Configuration window.
5. Enter the printer’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
•MAC Address: Use this field to enter the printer’s MAC address
(without the colons). For example, a MAC address of
00:15:99:29:51:A8 must be entered as 015992951A8.
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the
machine’s network interface and can be found on the
Network Configuration Report.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.133,
enter 192.168.1.X, where X is number between 1 and 254
(excluding the 133 used for the computer.)
•Subnet Mask: Enter this exactly the same as the computer’s
Subnet Mask.
•Default Gateway: Enter this exactly the same as the computer’s
Default Gateway.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network
administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Restoring factory default settings
You can restore factory default settings to the machine by using
SyncThru™ Web Service. You may need to reset the machine to the
factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to
new network environment.
Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™
Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
2. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
3. Click Reset. Then, click Clear for network.
4. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
You can also set the factory default settings on the control panel.
Select Clear Settings in Network menu. (See "Network" on
page 95.)
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your
wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was
set when the wireless router(access point) was installed. If you do not know
about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set up
your network.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use both control panel and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Using the control panel
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Wireless and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight WLAN Settings and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the setup method you want
highlights and press OK.
•Wizard: The wireless network interface card in your printer
searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results.
•Custom: You can configure the wireless settings according to
your needs.
Wizard mode
1. The wireless network interface card on your machine searches for
wireless network in the area and shows the results.
2. Press the up/down arrow to select a network you want to use in
Search List and press OK. You can select a network using SSID.
3. When None appears in WLAN Security on the display, press OK to
save your selection. go to step 6.
If you see another messages, go to the next step.
4. According to the network you select, WLAN security encryption type
will be WEP or WPA.
•In case of WEP, Press the up/down to selcet Open System or
SharedKey.
-Open System:Authentication is not used, and Encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security. Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after
selecting Open System.
-SharedKey:Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP Key can access the network. Enter the WEP
Key using number keypad after selecting SharedKey.
Network setup_ 45
•In case of WPA, Enter the WPA Key using number keypad. The
Key length should be between 8 to 63 characters long.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
•SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a
wireless network. Access points and wireless devices
attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use
the same SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
•WEP : WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a
wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
•WPA : WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret
key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
Custom mode
1. Enter the SSID when Edit SSID appears on the top line of the
display, the name that identifies a wireless network. SSID is
case-sensitive so you need to enter it carefully. Press OK.
2. Select the type of wireless connections. Press the up/down arrow to
select the method of Operation Mode you want and press OK.
•Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment. Go to step 3.
•Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point. Go to step 4.
3. Press the up/down arrow to select the method of Channel you want
and press OK. If you select Auto, the wireless network interface card
on your machine will automatically adjust the channels.
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the method of WLAN Security
you want and press OK.
•None: This is used when the validation of a wireless device’s
identity and data encryption are not required for your network.
Open system is used for IEEE 802.11 authentication.
•Static WEP: This uses the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
algorithm suggested by IEEE 802.11 standard for security. Static
WEP security mode requires a proper WEP key for data
encryption, decryption, and IEEE 802.11 authentication. Press
the left/right arrow to select the setup method you want in
Authentication and press OK.
-Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security. Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after
selecting Open System and then press OK.
-SharedKey:Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP Key can access the network. Enter the WEP
Key using number keypad after selecting SharedKey and
then press OK.
•WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK: You can select WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK to authenticate the print server based on WPA
Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called
Pre Shared Key passphrase) which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
a.Press OK when WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK appears on the
bottom line of the display.
b.Press the up/down arrow to select TKIP or AES in Encryption
and press OK. If you select WPA2-PSK, press the up/down
arrow to select AES or TKIP + AES in Encryption and press
OK.
c.Enter the WPA Key using number keypad and press OK.
5. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to the ready
mode. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please
ask the network administrator.
Disconnect the network cable (standard or crossover). Your
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the
network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and
wired LAN simultaneously.
Now go to "Installing wireless network connected machine’s driver" on
page 46.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, make sure cable
connection status.
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
2. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
3. Click Wireless and select Wizard. Then, click Next.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration.
However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select
Custom.
4. Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
•SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a
wireless network. Access points and wireless devices attempting
to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same
SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
Network setup_ 46
•Operation Mode:Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections.
-Ad-hoc: allows wireless devices to communicate directly
with each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
-Infrastructure: allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the
SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc,
select the machine’s SSID. Note that “airportthru” is the default
SSID of your machine.
5. Click Next.
If wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network key) and click Next.
6. The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup.
If the setup is right, click Apply.
7. Click OK.
Disconnect the network cable (standard or crossover). Your
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the
network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN
and wired LAN simultaneously.
Now go to "Installing wireless network connected machine’s driver"
on page 46.
Installing wireless network connected machine’s
driver
You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software
includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
• The following procedure is based on Windows XP. The procedure
and popup window which appears during the installation may differ
depending on the operating system, machine features, or the
interface in use.
• Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed.
All applications should be closed on your computer before
beginning installation.
1. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. The software
CD should automatically run and an installation window appear.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All programs > Accessories
>Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the
User Account Control windows.
2. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
3. Select Typical installation for a network printerGand then click Next.
If your printer is not connected to the network, the following
window will appear. Select a setup option you want, click Next.
Then the Set IP Address window appears. Do as follows:
a) Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list.
b) Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the
printer manually and click ConfigureGto set the specific IP
address for the network printer.
c) Click Next, and go to step 6.
d) You can also set the network printer via SyncThru Web
Service, an embedded web server. Click Launch SWS on Set
IP Address windows. Your machine’s embedded website
opens.
Network setup_ 47
4. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the
machine you want to install from the list and then click Next.
• If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine
to the network. To add the machine to the network, enter the
port name and the IP address for the machine. To verify your
machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a Network
Configuration page.
• To find a shared machine (UNC Path), select Shared Printer
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared
printer by clicking the Browse button.
• If you cannot find your machine in network,turn off the firewall
and clickUpdate. For Windows operating system, click Start >
Control Panel eWindows Firewall, and inactivate this option.
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click
Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip.
6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from
Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now registered
to the Samsung web site.
8. Otherwise, just click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
For windows follow the steps below to uninstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > your
printer driver name > Maintenance.
c) Select Remove and click Next.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item
individually.
d) Select the components you want to remove and then click Next.
e) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click Yes.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from
your computer.
f) After the software is removed, click Finish.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install.Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
10. Select Typical installation for a network print and click OK.
The certification window appears, click Trust. See "IP setting
using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 43.
11. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.
12. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
13. Click Add on the Printer List.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, press the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.
14. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, click IP.
15. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance
may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option.
16. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.
17. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
18. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
•For Mac OS X 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.
Your machine’s IP address appears on the Printer List, and is set as
the default machine.
19. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
Network setup_ 48
e) Double-click the Installer icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
i) When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
j) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Basic setup_ 49
4.basic setup
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like
to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
•Altitude adjustment
•Changing the display language
•Setting the date and time
•Changing the clock mode
•Changing the default mode
•Setting sounds
•Entering characters using the number keypad
•Using the save modes
•Setting the default tray and paper
•Changing the font setting
•Setting job timeout
•Auto continue
•Auto tray switch
ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the
machine.
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer
Software CD.
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X.
3. Click Printer Setting.
4. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select the appropriate value from
the dropdown list, and then click Apply.
• If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web
Service screen appears automatically. Click Machine Settings >
System Setup > Machine Setup > Altitude Adj. Select the
appropriate altitude value, and then click Apply.
• If your machine is connected via a USB cable, set the altitude in
Altitude Adj. option on the machine’s display screen.
CHANGING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE
To change the language that appears on the display, follow the steps below:
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Language and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to display the language you want.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
When you set the time and date, they are used in delay fax and delay print.
They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to
change it for the correct time being.
If the machine’s power is cut off, you need to reset the correct time
and date once the power has been restored.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Date & Time and press OK.
5. Enter the correct time and date using up/down, left/right arrow or
numeric keypad.
Month = 01 to 12,
Day = 01 to 31,
Year = requires four digits,
Hour = 01 to 12,
Minute = 00 to 59,
and you can also select AM or PM.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
CHANGING THE CLOCK MODE
You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12-hour
or 24-hour format.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
1High1
2Normal
0
Basic setup_ 50
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Clock Mode and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the other mode and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
CHANGING THE DEFAULT MODE
Your machine is preset to Copy mode. You can switch this default mode
between Fax mode and Copy mode.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Default Mode and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the mode you want.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
SETTING SOUNDS
You can control the following sounds:
•Key sound: Turns the key sound On or Off. With this option set to On, a
tone sounds each time a key is pressed.
•Alarm Sound: Turns the alarm sound On or Off. With this option set to
On, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication
ends.
•Speaker: Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through
the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to
Comm. which means “Common”, the speaker is on until the remote
machine answers.
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial. If your
machine is SCX-5635HN, you can adjust the volume level using
the handset.
•Ringer: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select
Off,Low,Mid, and High.
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Sound/Volume and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the sound option you want highlights and
press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status or volume for the sound
you have selected highlights and press OK.
6. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Speaker volume
To adjust the volume using On Hook Dial:
1. Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.
2. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.
3. Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode.
To adjust the volume using the handset (SCX-5635HN only)
1. Pick up the handset. A dial tone sounds from the earpice.
2. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.
3. Press OK to save the change and replace the handset.
You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is
connected.
ENTERING CHARACTERS USING THE NUMBER
KEYPAD
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers.
For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or
email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
Entering alphanumeric characters
1. When you are prompted to enter a letter, locate the button labeled with
the character you want. Press the button until the correct letter appears
on the display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO.
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O, m,
n, o and finally 6.
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign, and etc. For
details, see the below section.
2. To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the cursor by
pressing the left/right arrow button and then press the button labeled
with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the right and the next
letter will appear on the display.
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
3. When you have finished entering letters, press OK.
Keypad letters and numbers
Correcting numbers or names
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the left/right
arrow button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct
number or character.
KEY ASSIGNED NUMBERS, LETTERS, OR CHARACTERS
1 @ / . ‘ 1
2 A B C a b c 2
3 D E F d e f 3
4 G H I g h i 4
5 J K L j k l 5
6 M N O m n o 6
7 P Q R S p q r s 7
8 T U V t u v 8
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9
0& + - , 0
**
##
Basic setup_ 51
Inserting a pause
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9, for
example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases, you must insert a
pause in the telephone number. You can insert a pause while you are
setting up speed dial numbers.
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place while
entering the telephone number. A - appears on the display at the
corresponding location.
USING THE SAVE MODES
Using toner saving feature
Toner save mode allows your machine to use less toner on each page.
Activating this mode extends the life of the toner cartridge beyond what one
would experience in the normal mode, but it reduces print quality.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Toner Save and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When PC-printing, you can also turn on or off toner save mode in
the printer properties.
Using power saving feature
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save
power.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Power Save and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the time you want.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using scan power saving feature
Scan power save mode allows you to save power by turning off the scan
lamp. The scan lamp under the scanner glass automatically turns off when it
is not in actual use to reduce power consumption and extend the life of the
lamp. The lamp automatically wakes up after some warm-up time when you
start scanning.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Power Save and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the time you want.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
SETTING THE DEFAULT TRAY AND PAPER
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job.
In the control panel
Setting the paper size
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Size and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper size you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting the paper type
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Type and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper type you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting the paper source
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Source and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Tray or Fax Tray and
press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
In the computer
Windows
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings >Printers .
•For Windows XP/2003 select Printer and Faxes.
•For Windows Vista select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound >Printers.
3. Right-click your machine and press Printing Preferences.
4. Click Paper tab.
5. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.
6. Press OK.
Macintosh
Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to
change the default setting manually each time they want to print using
other settings.
1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Print.
3. Go to Paper Feed pane.
4. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.
Basic setup_ 52
5. Go to Paper pane.
6. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print.
7. Click Print to print.
CHANGING THE FONT SETTING
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Machine Settings.
5. Click Printer Setup.
6. Click PCL.
7. Select your preferred font in the Symbol Set list.
8. Click Apply.
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding
languages.
•Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
•Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)
•Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
•Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
•OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B
SETTING JOB TIMEOUT
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the
current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the amount of
time the machine will wait.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Timeout and press OK.
5. Enter the time using up/down arrow or numeric keypad.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
AUTO CONTINUE
This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not, in case that
the paper size you have set and the paper in the tray mismatches.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Auto Continue and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the setting option you want appears.
•On: Automatically prints after set time passes, when the paper size
mismatches the tray paper size.
•Off: Waits until you press Start on the control panel, when the paper
size mismatches the tray paper size.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
AUTO TRAY SWITCH
This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not, in case that
both tray1 and tray2 are filled with same size paper, the machine
automatically prints from tray2 after tray1 get empty.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Auto Tray Switch and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the setting option you want appears.
•On: Automatically prints after tray 1 get empty.
•Off: Waits until you load the paper in the tray 1.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Media and tray_ 53
5.media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
•Preparing originals
•Loading originals
•Selecting print media
•Changing the tray size
•Loading paper in the tray
•Printing on special media
•Setting the paper size and type
•selecting an output location
PREPARING ORIGINALS
•Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or
larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
•Do not attempt to load the following types of paper, in order to prevent
paper jam, low print quality and machine damage.
-Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
-Coated paper
-Onion skin or thin paper
-Wrinkled or creased paper
-Curled or rolled paper
-Torn paper
•Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
•Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely
dry before loading.
•Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
•Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with
other unusual characteristics.
LOADING ORIGINALS
You can use the scanner glass or the automatic document feeder to load an
original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder. If an original is
detected in the document feeder, the machine gives it priority over the
original on the scanner glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for
colored or gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass. And align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3. Close the scanner lid.
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy
quality and toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the
printout. Always keep it clean. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on
page 106.)
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then
Media and tray_ 54
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the lid open.
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
• Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid
may fall on your hands and get hurt.
• Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
In the document feeder
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m2,
20 lb bond) for one job.
1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
2. Load the original face up into the document feeder. Make sure that the
bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the
document input tray.
3. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the
printout. Always keep the glass clean. (See "Cleaning the scan
unit" on page 106.)
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines
for use with your machine.
Guidelines to select the print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide
may cause the following problems:
•Poor print quality
•Increased paper jams
•Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
•The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described in print media specifications. (See "Print media specifications"
on page 133.)
•Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
•Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper, more vibrant images.
•Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which cannot be controled.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the
warranty or service agreements.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type
used. (See "Print media specifications" on page 133.)
Media sizes supported in each mode
MODE SIZE SOURCE
Copy mode Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, Folio,
Executive, ISO B5, JIS
B5, A5, A6
•tray 1
•optional tray 2
•multi-purpose tray
Print mode All sizes supported by
the machine.
•tray 1
•optional tray 2
•multi-purpose tray
Fax mode Letter, A4, Legal •tray 1
•optional tray 2
Duplex printinga
a.75 to 90 g/m2 (20~24 lb bond) only
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio
•tray 1
•optional tray 2
•multi-purpose tray
Media and tray_ 55
CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To
change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
1. Press and hold the guide lock, and slide the paper length guide to locate
it in the correct paper size slot.
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
3. After inserting paper into the tray, adjust the support guide so that it
lightly touches the paper stack.
4. Squeeze the paper width guides, as shown and slide them to the stack
of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack.
• Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to
warp.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper
jams.
LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY
Tray 1 / optional tray
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into tray 1.
Tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of plain paper.
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to
load an additional 250 sheets of plain paper. (See "Available accessories"
on page 124.)
The paper level indicator on the front of the tray 1 and the optional tray 2
shows the amount of paper currently left in the tray. When the tray is empty,
the indicator of the bar is completely lowered.
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or
service agreements.
1Paper length guide
2Support guide
3Guide lock
4Paper width
guides
1Full
2Empty
Media and tray_ 56
1. Pull out tray. And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading.
(See "Changing the tray size" on page 55.)
2. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel. (See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59.)
• If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether
the paper meets the media specification. Then, try placing one
sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray. (See "Print media
specifications" on page 133.)
• The settings made from the machine driver override the
settings on the control panel.
a) To print in application, open an application and start the print
menu.
b) Open Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 61.)
c) Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an
appropriate paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to
Label.
d) Select tray in paper source, then press OK.
e) Start printing in application.
Multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page
printing on colored paper.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
•Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the
multi-purpose tray.
•To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is
still paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types
of print media.
•Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
•Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and
print quality problems. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading
them into the multi-purpose tray.
1. Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray
extension, as shown.
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
3. Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing up.
4. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be
bent, which will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
• When printing the special media, you must follow the
loading guideline. (See "Printing on special media" on
page 57.)
• When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose
tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try
printing again.
Media and tray_ 57
• When paper does not feed well while printing, push the
paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically.
5. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the
multi-purpose tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel. (See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59.)
The settings made from the machine driver override the
settings on the control panel.
a) To print in application, open an application and start the print
menu.
b) Open Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 61.)
c) Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an
appropriate paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to
Label.
d) Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.
e) Start printing in application.
f) After printing, close the multi-purpose tray.
PRINTING ON SPECIAL MEDIA
The table below shows the available special media for each tray.
When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a
time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray. (See
"Print media specifications" on page 133.)
The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type
option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This
setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the
best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
•Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is
monochrome and printing on the 60 g/m2 (16 lb) cotton paper.
•Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb) thick paper.
•Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.
•Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper.
•Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.
•Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.
•Recycled: 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) recycled paper.
•Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.
•Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency paper.
•Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.
•CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lb) cardstock.
•Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.
•Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for
a long period time, such as archives, select this option.
Envelope
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the
envelopes.
To print an envelope, place it flap side down with the stamp area on the top
left side.
If you need to do the printing job with a wrinkled envelopes, open the rear
door. Then pull down the pressure levers on each side.
•When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
-Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed
90 g/m2 otherwise, jam may occur.
-Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less
than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air.
-Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either
damaged.
-Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and
pressure of the machine during operation.
•Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.
•Do not use stamped envelopes.
TYPES TRAY 1 OPTIONAL
TRAY
MULTI-PURPOSE
TRAY
Thick OO O
Thin OO O
Cotton XX O
Color XX O
Preprinted XX O
Recycled OO O
Envelope XX O
Transparency XX O
Labels XX O
CardStock XX O
Bond XX O
Archive OO O
Media and tray_ 58
•Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining,
self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
•Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
•Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to
the corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
•Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s
fusing temperature for 0.1 second. To view the fusing temperature,
check your machine’s specification. (See "General specifications" on
page 129.) The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or
jams, and may even damage the fuser.
•For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from
the edges of the envelope.
•Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
Transparency
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use
in laser printers.
•Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand
machine’s fusing temperature.
•Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
•Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of
time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
•To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
•To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
•Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn
edges.
•Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet.
•To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the
printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out.
•Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox,
such as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780(Letter)
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
machines.
•When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your
machine’s fusing temperature. Check your machine’s specification to
view the fusing temperature. (See "General specifications" on
page 129.)
-Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between
them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
-Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm
of curl in any direction.
-Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
•Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can
cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to
machine components.
•Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the
machine.
•Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are
wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
•Do not print on media smaller than 76.2 mm (3 inches) wide or 127 mm
(5 inches) long.
•In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
Media and tray_ 59
Preprinted paper
When loading preprinted paper, printed side should be facing down with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
•Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not
melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the
machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature. (See "General
specifications" on page 129.)
•Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
•Forms should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent
changes during storage.
•Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper,
reducing print quality.
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
control panel. These settings will apply to copy and fax modes. For
computer printing, select the paper size and type in the application program
you use on your computer. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on
the control panel.
Setting the paper size
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Size and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper size you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
If you want to use special-sized paper-such as a billing paper, select
Custom in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences. (See "Opening
printing preferences" on page 61.)
Setting the paper type
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Type and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper type you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting the paper source
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Source and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Tray or Fax Tray and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
SELECTING AN OUTPUT LOCATION
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the
surface, and do not allow children near it.
The machine has two output locations: the rear door (face up) and the
output tray (face down).
The machine sends output to the output tray by default. To use the output
tray, make sure that the rear door is closed.
• If paper coming out of the output try has problems, such as
excessive curl, try printing to the rear door.
• To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear door while the
machine is printing.
Printing to the output tray
The output tray collects printed paper face down, in the order in which the
sheets were printed. The tray should be used for most print jobs.
1Output tray
2Rear door
Printing_ 60
6.printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
•Printer driver features
•Basic printing
•Opening printing preferences
•Using help
•Using special print features
•Changing the default print settings
•Setting your machine as a default machine
•Printing to a file (PRN)
•Macintosh printing
•Linux printing
•Printing with PS driver
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
•Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection
•Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer
drivers:
Some models or operating system may not support the certain
feature(s) in the following table.
PCL Printer driver
PostScript Printer driver
BASIC PRINTING
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary
depending on the application you use.
•Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the
composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check
the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine.
Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications .
(See "Printer specifications" on page 130.)
• When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see
a warning mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means
you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and
( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the
machine’s setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing
from various Windows applications.
Macintosh basic printing. (See "Macintosh printing" on page 65.)
Linux basic printing. (See "Linux printing" on page 67.)
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP.
Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your
operating system or the application you are using.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
FEATURE WINDOWS
Machine quality option O
Booklet printing O
Poster printing O
Multiple pages per sheet O
Fit to page printing O
Reduce and enlarge printing O
Different source for first page O
Watermark O
Overlay O
Double-sided printing (duplex) O
FEATURE WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Machine quality option OO O
Poster printing XX X
Multiple pages per sheet OO
(2, 4)
O
Fit to page printing OO O
Reduce and enlarge
printing
OX O
Different source for first
page
XX O
Watermark XX X
Overlay XX X
Double-sided printing
(duplex)aOO O
a. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.
FEATURE WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Printing_ 61
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print
window to change the print setting. (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 61. )
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
•For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers.
2. Double-click your machine.
3. From theDocument menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the
machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control
panel.
OPENING PRINTING PREFERENCES
You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing
Preferences.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4. Click Properties or Preferences.
Using a favorite setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tabGexcept for
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future
use.
To save a Presets item:
1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box. Click Save.
3. Click Save. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are
saved.
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The
machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.
To delete s saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click
Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default
Preset from the Presets drop down list.
Printing_ 62
USING HELP
Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click
on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with
information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in
the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of
the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or
registration and so on, click appropriate buttons.
USING SPECIAL PRINT FEATURES
Special print features include:
•"Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 62.
•"Printing posters" on page 62.
•"Printing booklets" on page 62.
•"Printing on both sides of paper" on page 62.
•"Change percentage of your document" on page 63.
•"Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 63.
•"Using watermarks" on page 63.
•"Using overlay" on page 64.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To
print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one
sheet.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type
drop-down list.
3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16)
in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the
sheet.
6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size,Source, and Type.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print windowU
Printing posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16
sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one
poster-size document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the page layout you want.
Specification of the page layout:
•Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4
pages.
•Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9
pages.
•Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16
pages.
4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters
or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to
make it easier to paste the sheets together.
5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size,Source, and Type.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit thePrint windowU
7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
Printing booklets
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the
pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a
booklet.
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4,
Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down
list.
3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size,Source, and Type.
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In
order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the
available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be
automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without
or mark).
4. Click OK or Print until you exit thePrint windowU
5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Printing on both sides of paper
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how
you want your document oriented. You can only use this feature with Letter,
Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper.
Do not print on both sides of the special media, such as labels,
8
9
Printing_ 63
envelopesS or thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause
a paper jam or damage the machine.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Basic tab.
3. From theDouble-sided Printing section, select the binding option you
want.
•Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined
by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine.
•None
•Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
•Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
calendars.
•Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the
print order when duplex printing.
4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size,Source, and Type.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print windowU
Change percentage of your document
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the
printed page by typing in a percentage you want.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrowsGto select the scaling rate.
4. Select the Size,Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print windowU
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper
size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page .
4. Select the Size,Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit thePrint windowU
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.
For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading
“DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all
pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They
can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
Using an existing watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the
Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in
the preview image.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print windowU
Creating a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the WatermarkGdrop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can
enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview
window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on
the first page only.
4. Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font
Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from
the Message Angle section.
A
Printing_ 64
5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermaks list.
6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the
Print window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark
drop-down list.
Editing a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the WatermarkGdrop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks
list and change the watermark message and options.
4. Click Update to save the changes.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Deleting a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the WatermarkGdrop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermarks list and click Delete.
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using overlay
What is an overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive
(HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather
than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print
a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead
overlay on your document.
Creating a new page overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing
your logo or image.
1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a
new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to
appear when printed as an overlay.
2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.
(See "Opening printing preferences" on page 61.)
3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down
list. Edit OverlayGwindow appears.
4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the
File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The
default is C:\Formover.)
6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print windowU
8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk
drive.
The overlay document size must be the same as the document
you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a
watermark.
Using a page overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your
document. To print an overlay with a document:
1. Create or open the document you want to print.
2. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 61.)
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in theText drop-down
list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file
you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external
source, you can also load the file when you access the Load
Overlay window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay
List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List box.
6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If
this box is checked, a message window appears each time you
submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to
print an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the
overlay automatically prints with your document.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that
of the document you will print with the overlay.
Deleting a page overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
4. Click Delete.
5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
CHANGING THE DEFAULT PRINT SETTINGS
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
•For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
2. Select your machine.
3. Right-click on the machine driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
4. Change the settings on each tab.
Printing_ 65
5. Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in
Printing Preferences.
SETTING YOUR MACHINE AS A DEFAULT
MACHINE
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
•For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers.
2. Select your machine.
3. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
PRINTING TO A FILE (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
To create a file:
1. Check thePrint to file box at the Print window.
2. Click Print.
3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For
example c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in
My Documents.
MACINTOSH PRINTING
This section explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print
environment before printing.
•USB connected (See "Macintosh" on page 35.)
•Network connected (See "Macintosh" on page 41.)
Printing a document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver
setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a
Macintosh:
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
4. Open the File menu and click Print.
5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you
want to print.
6. Click Print.
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine
name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending
on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer
properties window is similar to the following.
The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh
OS version.
Layout
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears
on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the
following features.
•Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be
printed on one page. (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 66.)
•Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing
direction on a page similar to the examples on UI.
•Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page
on the sheet.
•Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides of a
paper.(See "Printing on both sides of paper" on page 66.)
•Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper
180 degrees.
Printing_ 66
Graphics
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select
Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the
graphic features.
•Resolution: This option allows you to select the printing resolution.
The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters
and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes
to print a document.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If
you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper
type.
Printer Features
Printer Features tab provides Reverse Duplex Printing and Fit to
Page options. Select Printer Features from the drop-down list under
Orientation to access the following features.
•Reverse Duplex Printing: This option allows you to select general
print order compared to duplex print order. If this option does not
appear, your machine does not have this feature.
•Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be
useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.
Toner Save Mode
Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces
your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality..
•Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined
by the setting you have made on the control panel of the printer.
•On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each
page.
•Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document,
select this option.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
3. Select the other options you want to use.
4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected number of pages you
want to print on one sheet of paper.
Printing on both sides of paper
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode,
decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The
binding options are, as follows:
•Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in
book binding.
•Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
1. From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
3. Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option.
4. Select the other options you want to use.
Printing_ 67
5. Click Print, then the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy
might print on same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of
paper when you are printing more than 1 copy.
LINUX PRINTING
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common
UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any
such application.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu
2. Select Print directly using lpr.
3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from
the printer list and click Properties.
4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at
the top of the window.
•General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper
type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex
feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of
pages per sheet.
•Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the
text options, such as spacing or columns.
•Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used
when printing imageGfiles, such as color options, image size, or
image position.
•Device: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper
source, and destination.
5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your
print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Printing files
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the
standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS
lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the
standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1. Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click
Open.
2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change
the print job properties.
3. Click OK to start printing.
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers
configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as
a printer.
1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.
Printing_ 68
3. The Printer Properties window opens.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•General: This option allows you to change the printer location and
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in
Printers configuration.
•Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If
you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa
while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
•Driver: This option allows you to view or select another machine
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
•Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check
box to see previous jobs on the job list.
•Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click
Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click
Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected
class.
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties
window.
PRINTING WITH PS DRIVER
PS printer driver PPD file is provided on the supplied software CD.
If you select Typical installation for a local printer or Typical installation
for a network printerGwhen installing machine’s driver, PS driver will
automatically be installed. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver"
on page 34.)
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it. (See
"Activating the added accessories in PS printer properties" on
page 126.)
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. It may look
slightly different depending on your application.
The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These
settings include the number of copies and print range.
3. Select your machine’s PS driver from the Select Printer list.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print
window to change the print setting. (See "Understanding PS
driver’s Printing Preferences" on page 68.)
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
Understanding PS driver’s Printing Preferences
Opening Printing Preferences
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine’s PS driver from the Select Printer.
4. Click Properties or Preferences.
Layout tab
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears
on the printed page.
Orientation
This option allows you to select the direction in which the information is
printed on a page.
•Portrait: This option prints across the width of the page, letter style.
•Landscape: This option prints across the length of the page,
spreadsheet style.
•Rotate Landscape: This option allows you to rotate the page, 180
degrees.
Printing_ 69
Print on Both Sides
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing, decide
how you want your document oriented.
•None
•Flip on Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
•Flip on Short Edge: This option is the type often used with
calendars.
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or
thick papers. It may result in paper jam and damage to the
machine.
Page Order
This option allows you to select the printout order.
•Front to Back: Pages are printed out in regular order.
•Back to Front: Pages are printed out in reverse order.
Pages Per Sheet
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.
To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size
and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on
one sheet.
Advanced
You can select Paper Size,Graphic, and Document Options.
•Paper/Output: This option allows you to choose paper size you
want to use.
•Graphic: This option allows you to select printing quality options.
•Document Options: This option allows you to select options such
as PostScript Options and, Printer Features.
Paper/Quality tab
You can select paper tray and media type.
•Paper Source: This option allows you to choose which tray to use.
•Media: This option allows you to choose which media to use.
Copying_ 70
7.copying
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.
This chapter includes:
•Basic copy
•Changing the settings for each copy
•Changing the default copy settings
•Using special copy features
•Copying on both sides of originals
•Deciding the form of copy output
•Setting copy timeout
BASIC COPY
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the
scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the
scanner lid.
3. If necessary, adjust the settings for each copy such as Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness,Original Type and more. (See "Changing the settings for
each copy" on page 70.)
4. Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
5. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop/Clear on the control panel.
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly
and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for
each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control panel.
If you press Stop/Clear while setting the copy options, all of the
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and
return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in
progressU
Changing the darkness
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can
adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Darkness and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the contrast mode you want highlights
and press OK.
•Light: Works well with dark print.
•Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.
•Dark: Works well with light print.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Selecting the type of originals
The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document type for the current copy job.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Original Type and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the image mode you want highlights and
press OK.
•Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
•Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
•Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Reducing or enlarging copies
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400%
when you copy original documents from the scanner glass, or from 25% to
100% from the ADF.
To select from the predefined copy sizes:
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reduce/Enlarge and press
OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the size setting you want highlights
and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Copying_ 71
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate:
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reduce/Enlarge and press
OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Custom and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow or numeric keypad to enter the copy size
you want. Pressing and holding the up/down arrow allows you to
quickly scroll to the number you want.
7. Press OK to save the selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the
bottom of your copy.
CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS
The copy options, including darkness, original type, copy size, collation and
number of copies, can be set to those most frequently used. When you copy
a document, the default settings are used unless they have been changed
by using the corresponding buttons on the control panel.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Change Default and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want highlights and
press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want highlights and press
OK.
7. Repeat steps 5 through 6, as needed.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear cancels the
changed settings and restores the defaults.
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES
You can use the following copy features:
ID card copying
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet of A4-, Letter-,
Legal-, Folio-, Executive-, B5, A5, or A6-sized paper.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business
card.
• This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the
scanner glass.
• The size of the 2-sided originals should be smaller than A5, if not,
some of it won’t be copied.
1. Press ID Copy on the control panel.
2. Place Front Side Press OK appears on the display.
3. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.
4. Press OK on the control panel.
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Rear
Side Press OK.
5. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows
indicate as shown then, close the scanner lid.
6. Press OK on the control panel to begin copying.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may
not be printed.
• If you don’t press the OK button, only the front side will be copied.
• If you press Stop/Clear, the machine cancles the copy job and
returns to ready mode.
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages
onto one sheet of paper.
2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the
document feeder.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until 2-Up or 4-Up highlights and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the
N-Up feature.
Poster copying
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages
together to make one poster-sized document.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1 2
1 2
3 4
Copying_ 72
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Poster Copy and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and
printed one by one in the following order:
Clone copying
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number
of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper
size.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Clone Copy and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the
Clone Copy feature.
COPYING ON BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Duplex Print and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want highlights.
•Off: Prints in Normal mode.
•1->2Side Long: Prints pages to be read like a book.
•1->2Side Short: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
6. Press OK to save your selection.
7. Start copying a document.
DECIDING THE FORM OF COPY OUTPUT
You can set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2
copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print follwed
by a second complete document.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the
scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the
scanner lid.
3. Press OK and enter the number of copies using the number keypad.
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Change Default and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Collation and press OK.
8. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
•On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
•Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
9. Press Start to begin copying.
One complete document will print followed by the second complete
document.
SETTING COPY TIMEOUT
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy
settings, if you do not start copying after changing them on the control
panel.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Timeout and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the time setting you want highlights.
Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default
settings until you press Start to begin copying, or Stop/Clear to cancel.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
2
5
3
Scanning_ 73
8.scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.
This chapter includes:
•Basic scanning method
•Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
•Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)
•Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to server)
•Setting authentication for authorized user
•Using Samsung Scan Manager
•Changing the scan feature settings
•Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
•Scanning using the WIA driver
•Macintosh scanning
•Linux Scanning
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced
resolution.
BASIC SCANNING METHOD
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the
network.
•Samsung Scan Manager: You just walk to the machine with the
originals and scan them from the control panelU Then, the scanned data
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When
you install all the softwares in the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan
Manager is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature
can be used via the local connection or the network connection. (See
"Using Samsung Scan Manager" on page 76.)
•TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning
an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or
the network connection. (See "Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software"
on page 78.)
•SmarThru Office : This program is the accompanying software for your
machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents. This
feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection.
(See "Smarthru Office" on page 101.)
•WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature,
your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB
cable. (See "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 78.)
•Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment. (See
"Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on
page 73.)
•FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See
"Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to server)" on
page 75.)
•SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB
server. (See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
server)" on page 75.)
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING
THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several
destinations from the machine by email.
Setting up an email account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.
4. Select IP Address or Host Name.
5. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 25.
7. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
8. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
9. Click Apply.
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP,
put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP
Authentication.
a) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
b) Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port
number is 25.
Scanning_ 74
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as
an email attachment
1. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
2. Press Scan/Email on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To Email and press OK.
If you registered Auth ID,Password and checked Require Local
Authentication in User Authentication on SyncThru Web
Service ,Login Name and Enter Password appear. Enter the
Auth ID and Password to your machine. Go to step 5.
4. When From: appears on the top line of the display, enter the sender’s
email address and press OK.
5. When Destination Email: appears on the top line of the display, enter
the recipient’s email address and press OK.
6. To enter additional addresses, press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes
and press OK.
To continue to the next step, press the left/right arrow to highlight No
and press OK.
7. If the display asks if you want to see the recipient’s email address, press
the left/right arrow to highlight Yes or No and press OK.
8. If the displays asks if you want to send the email to your account, press
the left/right arrow to highlight Yes or No and press OK.
This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Auto Send
To Self option in the SMTP Client Setup on SyncThru Web
Service.
9. Enter an email subject and press OK.
10. Press the up/down arrow until the file type you want highlights and press
OK.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot use the
machine to copy or to send a fax.
11. If the display asks if you want to log off your account, press the left/right
arrow to highlight Yes or No and press OK.
12. Press the Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Storing email addresses
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently
via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email
addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address
Book.
Storing on your local machine
This method means that you store email addresses on your machine’s
memory. You can add addresses, as well as group them in particular
catagories.
Individual
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Individual Address
Book. The screen shows Individual Address Book on the right
side of the screen.
5. Click Add.
6. When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Index number,
enter User Name and E-mail Address.
7. Click Apply.
Group
1. Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.
2. Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.
3. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Group Address Book.
Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the Group number and enter Group Name.
6. Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes.
7. Click Apply.
Searching Address Book for an entry
There are two ways to search for an address in memory. You can either
scan from 0 to 199 sequentially or search by entering the first letters of
the name associated with the address.
Searching sequentially through memory
1. Press Scan/Email and Address Book on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Send and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and
press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight All and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the name and address you want
highlights. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire
memory in index(numerical) order.
Searching with a particular first letter
1. Press Scan/Email and Address Book on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Send and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and
press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight ID and press OK.
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the name you want highlights and
press OK.
Printing Address Book
You can check your Address Book information by printing a list.
1. Press Scan/Email and Address Book on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Print and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and
press OK.
Your Address Book information prints out.
Scanning_ 75
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING TO
YOUR COMPUTER (SCAN TO PC)
You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan Manager
program that is installed in your networked computer.
For USB connected machine
This is a basic scanning method for usbGconnected machine.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
3. Press Scan/Email on the control panel.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To PC and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Local PC and press OK.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the application program you want
highlights and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or
delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager >
Properties > Set Scan Button.
7. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want highlights and press
OK.
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
•Scan Size: Sets the image size.
•Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan
destination to My Documents.
• If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.
8. Scanning begins.
• Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My
Pictures > Samsung folder.
• You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan
Manager program.
• You can also scan by pressing Window’s Start > Control
Panel > Samsung Scan Manager > Quick Scan.
For network connected machine
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software
CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program. (See "Installing
wired network connected machine’s driver" on page 40.)
1. Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a
network and Samsung Scan Manager is installed on the computer.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Press Scan/Email on the control panel.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To PC and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network PC and press OK.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
6. Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
•ID is the same ID as the registered Computer ID for Samsung
Scan Manager.
•Password is the 4 digit number registered Password for
Samsung Scan Manager.
7. Press the up/down arrow until the application program you want
highlights and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or
delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager >
Properties > Set Scan Button.
8. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want highlights and press
OK.
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
•Scan Size: Sets the image size.
•Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan
destination to My Documents.
• If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.
9. Scanning begins.
• Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My
Pictures > Samsung folder.
• You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan
Manager program.
• You can also scan by pressing Window’s Start > Control
Panel > Samsung Scan Manager > Quick Scan.
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA
SMB/FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)
You can scan an image and send it to a total of five destinations via the
SMB or FTP.
Setting up an FTP server
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP
servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Machine Settings eFTP SetupGeGServer List.
5. Click Add.
6. Select the Index number, from 1 to 20.
7. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup. This name will be displayed on
your machine.
8. Select IP Address or Host Name.
9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 21.
11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to permit
access to unauthorized people.
This box is unchecked by default.
Scanning_ 76
12. Enter the Login Name and Login Password.
13. Enter the Scan File Folder for saving the scanned image.
14. Click Apply.
Setting up an SMB server
To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to SMB
servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Machine Settings > SMB Setup > Server List.
5. Click Add.
6. Select the Index number, from 1 to 20.
7. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup. This name will be displayed on
your machine.
8. Select IP Address or Host Name.
9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 139.
11. Enter the Share name of the server.
12. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit unauthorized
persons to access the SMB server.
This box is unchecked by default.
13. Enter the User Name and User Password.
14. Enter the User Domain.
15. Enter the Scan File Folder for storing the scanned image.
16. Click Apply.
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass..
3. Press Scan/Email on the control panel.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP,
and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the server you want highlights and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the scan format you want highlights and
press OK.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.
SETTING AUTHENTICATION FOR AUTHORIZED
USER
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.
To send a scanned image through email or via network server safely, you
must register account information of authorized users to your local machine
using SyncThru™ Web Service.
•If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users
can send scanned data to the network (email, FTP, SMB).
•For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must register
the network or local authentication configuration using the SyncThru™
Web Service.
•User authentication has 2 options: No Authentication (Default) and
Require Local Authentication.
Registering local authorized users
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Machine Settings
G
eGUser Authentication.
5. Select Require Local Authentication in the Setup section.
If you have not set Default[From:] Address in SMTP Client
Setup, the notifying pop-up window appears. Click OK to browse
the Web page where you can set the default email address.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK in the modifying confirmation pop-up window.
8. Select Local Authentication in the left pane.
9. Click Add.
10. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the
entry, from 1 to 50.
11. Enter User Name,Auth ID,Password,E-mail Address and Phone
number.
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine
when you start scanning to email from the control panel.
12. Click Apply.
USING SAMSUNG SCAN MANAGER
If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program
has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about
this program information and the installed scan driver's condition. Through
this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders
where scanned documents are saved in your computer.
The Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the
Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, See
"Setting scan information in Scan Manager" on page 79.
1. From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan Manager.
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the Smart
Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan ManagerG
window.
3. Press Properties.
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination
and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab.
(Local or Network)
5. When setting is done, press OK.
Scanning_ 77
Set Scan Button tab
Scan Destination
•Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel
Destination List.
•Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to
open scanned image.
•Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to
Available Destination List,
•Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the
user in the Available Destination List.
•File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be
saved. You can choose among BMP,JPEG,PDF,Gand TIFF.
Scan Property
•Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.
•Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default
saving folder.
•Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.
•Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.
•Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.
•ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does
not support this option, it will be grayed out.
•Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.
•Default: Allows you to go back to default options.
Change Port tab
Local Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.
Network Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via network port.
•Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your
machine.
•IP address: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your
machine.
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to
customize your scan jobs. The settings you change will be maintained for a
certain time, but after that period, the options will be reset to default values.
•Scan Size:Sets the image size.
•Original Type: Sets the original documents’s type.
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•Scan Color:Sets the color mode.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear.
To customize the settings before starting a scan job:
1. Press Scan/Email.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down until the scan type you want highlights and press OK.
5. Press the up/down until the scan setting option you want highlights and
press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status highlights and press
OK.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options.
8. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS
To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up
default scan settings for each scan type.
1. Press Scan/Email.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
Scanning_ 78
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Setup and press OK.
4. Press OK when Change Default highlights .
5. Press the up/down until the scan type you want highlights and press OK.
6. Press the up/down until the scan setting option you want highlights and
press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status highlights and press
OK.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set other setting options.
9. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
SCANNING WITH TWAIN-ENABLED SOFTWARE
If you want to scan documents using other softwares, you will need to use
TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.
Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
3. Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
4. Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
5. Scan and save your scanned image.
SCANNING USING THE WIA DRIVER
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by
Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike
the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust
images without using additional software.
The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with a USB port.
Windows XP
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel, > Scanners and Cameras.
4. Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera
Wizard appears.
5. Click Next.
6. Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click
Preview to see how your options affect the picture.
7. Click Next.
8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the
picture.
9. Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose
one of the options on screen.
10. Click Next.
11. Click Finish.
Windows Vista
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Scanners and Cameras.
4. Double click Scan a document or picture.Windows Fax and Scan
application appears.
• You can click on View scanners and cameras to view
scanners,
• If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint
program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera... .
5. Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.
6. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
7. Click Scan.
If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on the
Scanner and Camera Wizard.
MACINTOSH SCANNING
You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Macintosh OS
offers Image Capture program.
Scanning with USB
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.
If No Image Capture device connected message appears,
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem
continues,refer to the Image Capture’s help.
4. Set the scan options on this program.
5. Scan and save your scanned image.
• For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the
Image Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant softwares.
Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Scanning with network
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder , or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
Scanning_ 79
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.
4. Click Devices and click Browse Devices.
5. For Mac OS X 10.4:
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click Connect.
•If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port.
•If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change Port..
to select port.
Refer to Scan Manager for Change port.. use. (See "Setting
scan information in Scan Manager" on page 79.)
For Mac OS X 10.5:
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in
Bonjour Devices.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps
above.
6. Set the scan options on this program.
7. Scan and save your scanned image.
• For more information about using Image Capture,refer to the
Image Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant softwares.
Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Setting scan information in Scan Manager
To find out about Scan Manager program information, to check the
installed scan driver's condition, to change scan settings. and to add or
delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in
Scan Manager program, follow these instructions:
1. From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Scan Manager .
3. Press Properties.
4. Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings,
to add or delete application programs, and to format files. You can
change the scanning machine by using Change port. (Local or
Network)
5. When done, press OK.
LINUX SCANNING
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.
Scanning
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2. Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
3. Select the scanner on the list.
If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer
and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically
selected.
If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer, you can
select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is
in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set
the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.
4. Click Properties.
5. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 53.)
6. From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.
7. Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview
Pane.
8. Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections.
•Image Quality: This option allows you to select the color
composition and the scan resolution for the image.
•Scan Area: This option allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select the
option from the Job Type drop-down list. (See "Adding Job Type
Scanning_ 80
Settings" on page 80.)
Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options.
9. When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the
progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.
10. The scanned image appears.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. (See "Using the
Image Manager" on page 80.)
11. When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
12. Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the
file name.
13. Click Save.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings for later use.
To save a new Job Type setting:
1. Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
2. Click Save As.
3. Enter the name for your setting.
4. Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:
1. Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list.
2. The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved
setting is automatically selected for the scan job.
To delete a Job Type setting
1. Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down
list.
2. Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list.
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and
tools to edit your scanned image.
Use the following tools to edit the image:
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the on
screen help.
TOOLS NAME FUNCTION
Save Saves the image.
Undo Cancels your last action.
Redo Restores the action you canceled.
Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crop Crops the selected image area.
Zoom Out Zooms the image out.
Zoom In Zooms the image in.
Scale Allows you to scale the image size; you can
enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale
proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Rotate Allows you to rotate the image; you can select
the number of degrees from the drop-down list.
Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Effect Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of
the image, or to invert the image.
Properties Shows the properties of the image.
Faxing_ 81
9.faxing
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
•Preparing to fax
•Sending a fax
•Receiving a fax
•Adjusting the document settings
•Forwarding a fax to other destination
•Setting up address book
•Printing sent fax report automatically
• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals
and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet
Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.
1Line port
2Micro filter
3DSL modem / Telephone line
PREPARING TO FAX
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord
to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.
The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to
another.
SENDING A FAX
This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of
transmission.
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder
or the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 53.) If the
originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner
glass, the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first,
which has higher priority in scanning.
Setting the fax header
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on
any fax you send.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine ID and press OK.
5. Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad. You
can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, and
include special symbols by pressing the 1 button. For details on how to
enter alphanumeric characters, see "Entering characters using the
number keypad" on page 50.
6. Press OK to save the ID.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Fax No. and press OK.
8. Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Sending a fax
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 85.)
4. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.
You can use speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers. For details
about storing and searching for a number, see "Setting up address
book" on page 86.
5. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a
fax to destinations.
• If you want to send fax directly from your computer, use SmarThru
Office. (See "Using SmarThru Office" on page 101.)
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear before the
machine start transmission.
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message
asking to place another page.
• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at
the same time.
Faxing_ 82
Sending a fax manually
This method is sending a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel. If
your machine is SCX-5635HN, you can send a fax using the handset.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 85.)
4. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset.
5. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
6. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax
machine.
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while
sending.
Confirming a transmission
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message
appears on the display. For a list of error messages and their meanings, see
"Understanding display messages" on page 112. If you receive an error
message, press Stop/Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax
again.
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed. For further details, see "Printing sent fax
report automatically" on page 88.
Automatic redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you
send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number every three
minutes, up to seven times according to the factory default settings..
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the number
without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial
attempts. (see "Changing the fax setup options" on page 92.)
Redialing the last number
To redial the number you called last:
1. Press Redial/Pause on the control panel.
2. When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine
automatically begins to send.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No at the Another Page? prompt.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax to
multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to
a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased
from memory. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 85.)
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Multi Send and press OK.
7. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using
Address book button. For details, see "Setting up address book" on
page 86.
8. Enter the second fax number and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
9. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 7 and 8. You can add up to 10 destinations.
10. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial numbers anymore.
11. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.
12. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 85.)
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Delay Send and press OK.
7. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using
Address book button. For details, see "Setting up address book" on
page 86.
8. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
9. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial numbers anymore.
10. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.
11. Enter the job name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Entering
characters using the number keypad" on page 50.
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.
12. Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK.
If you set a time earier than the current time, the fax will be sent at
that time on the following day.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
13. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
Faxing_ 83
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved
in memory.
1. Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Add pages and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the fax job you want appears and
press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine scans the original into memory.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Canceling a reserved delay fax job
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved
in memory.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Cancel Job and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the fax job you want appears and
press OK.
5. Press OK when Yes highlights.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority
transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between
stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before
transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 85.)
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Priority Send and press OK.
7. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using
Address book button. For details, see "Setting up address book" on
page 86.
8. Enter the job name you want and press OK.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
9. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.
RECEIVING A FAX
This part explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving methods
available.
Changing the receive modes
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to
another mode, follow the steps below:
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Mode and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the fax reception mode you want
highlights.
•Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the
fax reception mode.
•Tel: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start. If
your machine is SCX-5635HN, you can receive a fax by picking up
the handset.
•Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to
Fax mode to receive the fax.
•DRPD: you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 84.
7. Press OK to save your selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
• To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the
EXT socket on the back of your machine.
• If you do not want other people to view your received
documents, you can use secure receiving mode. In this mode,
all of the received faxes are stored in memory. For further
details, see "Receiving in secure receiving mode" on page 84.
Receiving manually in Tel mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine
begins receiving a fax. If your machine is SCX-5635HN, you can answer
calls using the handset.
To change the number of rings, see "Changing the fax setup options" on
page 92.
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax
mode
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT
socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 29.)
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after
a predefined number of rings.
• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
• If you are in Tel mode when the answering machine is connected
Faxing_ 84
to your machine, you must switch off the answering machine.
otherwise, the outgoing message from the answering machine will
interrupt your phone conversation.
Receiving faxes manually using an extension
telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without
going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press
the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
wish. For details about changing the code, see "Changing the fax setup
options" on page 92
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to
use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short
ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services who
answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, your fax
machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered by the fax
machine. Unless you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be
recognized and answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be
forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into
the EXT socket. You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time.
Before using the DRPD option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on
your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up DRPD, you will
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial
your fax number from outside.
To set up the DRPD mode:
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Mode and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight DRPD and press OK.
Waiting Ring appears on the display.
7. Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to
place the call from a fax machine.
8. When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern..
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 6.
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number,
or connect the machine to another telephone line.
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to
verify that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a
call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to
be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or
answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
Receiving in secure receiving mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. When the mode is
deactivated, any stored faxes are printed.
Activating secure receiving mode
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Secure Receive and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
6. Enter a four-digit password you want to use and press OK.
You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a
password, but cannot protect your faxes.
7. Re-enter the password to confirm it and press OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When a fax is received in secure receiving mode, your machine stores it in
memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax
received.
Printing received faxes
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in
“Activating secure receiving mode.”
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Print and press OK.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK.
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
Deactivating secure receiving mode
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in
“Activating secure receiving mode.”
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Off and press OK.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK.
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in
memory.
4. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper
Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the received
fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Duplex Print and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want highlights.
•Off:Prints in Normal mode.
•Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
Faxing_ 85
•Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
7. Press OK to save your selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your
original’s status to get the best quality.
Resolution
The default document settings procedure good results when using typical
text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality,
or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher
quality fax.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Resolution and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and press
OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Recommended resolution settings for different original document types are
described in the table below:
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting, see "Change Default" on page 93.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Darkness and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and press
OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting, see "Change Default" on page 93.
FORWARDING A FAX TO OTHER DESTINATION
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other
destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to
receive the fax, this feature may be useful.
When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server and
IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Using SyncThru™ Web
Service" on page 99.)
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination
by faxing.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
MODE RECOMMENDED FOR:
Standard Originals with normal sized characters.
Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or
originals printed using a dot-matrix printer.
2
5
3
Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you
are communicating also supports the Super Fine
resolution.
• For memory transmission, Super Fine
mode is not available. The resolution setting
is automatically changed to Fine
• When your machine is set to Super Fine
resolution and the fax machine with which
you are communicating does not support
Super Fine resolution, the machine
transmits using the highest resolution mode
supported by the other fax machine.
Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.
Color Fax Originals with colors. Sending a color fax is enabled
only if the machine with which you are
communicating supports color fax reception and you
send the fax manually. In this mode, memory
transmission is not available.
MODE RECOMMENDED FOR:
Faxing_ 86
8. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and
press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a
fax
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward & Print.
8. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and
press OK.
9. Enter the starting time using up/down, left/right arrow or numeric keypad
and press OK.
10. Enter the ending time using up/down, left/right arrow or numeric keypad
and press OK.
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax
machine.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an
email
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Email and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
8. Enter your email address and press OK.
9. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.
10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an
email
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Email and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward & Print.
8. Enter your email address and press OK.
9. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.
10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified email
address.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a
server
When you forward a fax to FTP or SMB server, you firstly set the
server in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Setting up an FTP server"
on page 75 or "Setting up an SMB server" on page 76.) You can
forward a fax to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Server and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified server.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by
server
When you forward a fax to FTP or SMB server, you firstly set the
server in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Setting up an FTP server"
on page 75 or "Setting up an SMB server" on page 76.) You can
forward a fax to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Server and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward & Print.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified server.
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK
You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most
frequently. Your machine provides you with the following features for setting
up Address Book:
Before beginning to store fax numbers, make sure that your machine
is in Fax mode.
Speed dial numbers
You can store up to 200 frequently-used fax numbers in speed dial
numbers.
Registering a speed dial number
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.
Faxing_ 87
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Speed Dial and press OK.
5. Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display
shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with
another speed dial number, press Back.
6. Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see ""Entering
characters using the number keypad" on page 50.
7. Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Editing speed dial numbers
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Speed Dial and press OK.
5. Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
6. Change the name and press OK.
7. Change the fax number and press OK.
8. Change the name and press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a
fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you
want.
•For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad.
•For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address
Book. (See "Searching Address Book for an entry" on page 87.)
Group dial numbers
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can
group these destinations and set them under a group dial number. You can
then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the destinations
within the group. You can set up to 100 (0 through 99) group dial numbers
using the destination’s existing speed dial numbers.
Registering a group dial number
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.
5. Enter a group dial number between 0 and 99 and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display
shows the message to allow you to change it.
6. Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see ""Entering
characters using the number keypad" on page 50.
7. Enter the first few letters of the speed dial’s name you want.
8. Press the up/down arrow until the name and number you want
highlights and press OK.
9. Press OK when Yes highlights at the Add Another? prompt.
Repeat step 7 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.
10. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the
Add Another? prompt and press OK.
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Editing a group dial number
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.
5. Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
6. Enter the name you want to edit and press OK.
7. Enter the first few letters of the speed dial’s name you want to add or
delete.
8. Press the up/down arrow until the name and number you want
highlights and press OK.
If you entered a new speed dial number, Add? appears.
If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group, Delete?
appears.
9. Press OK to add or delete the number.
10. Press OK when Yes highlights to add or delete more numbers and
repeat steps 7 and 8.
11. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the
Another Number? and press OK.
12. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using group dial numbers
To use a group dial entry, you need to search for and select it from
memory.
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax,
press Address Book. See below.
Searching Address Book for an entry
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan
from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the
name associated with the number.
Searching sequentially through the memory
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Dial and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight All and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the name and number you want
highlights. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire
memory in alphabetical order.
Searching sequentially through the memory
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Dial and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search ID and press OK.
6. Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
7. Press the up/down arrow until the group dial’s name and number you
want highlights.
Faxing_ 88
Deleting a Address Book for entry
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Delete and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the deleting option you want highlights
and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the searching method you want
highlights and press OK.
Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all
entries in Address Book.
Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the
name.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the name you want highlights and
press OK.
Or, enter the first letters. Press the up/down arrow until the name you
want highlights and press OK.
7. Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm the deletion.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Printing Address Book
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Address Book on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Print and press OK.
The machine begins printing.
PRINTING SENT FAX REPORT
AUTOMATICALLY
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.
1. Press Fax on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Auto Report and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using USB memory device_ 89
10.using usb memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•About USB memory device
•Scanning to an USB memory device
•Printing from a USB memory device
•backing up data
•managing usb memory
ABOUT USB MEMORY DEVICE
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, music and
videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to
store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:
•Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.
•Print data stored on an USB memory device.
•Format the USB memory device.
Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and
sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type
connector.
Use only an USB memory deviceGwith metal-shielded connector.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
• Do not remove the USB memory device while it is in use. The
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user’s
misuse.
• If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security
settings and password settings, your machine may not
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see USB
memory device’s User’s Guide.
SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB
memory device. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan to the
device using the default settings, or you can customize your own scan
settings. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default settings
such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan setting.
Scanning
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass..
3. Press Scan/Email and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To USB and press OK.
Your machine begins scanning the original, and then asks if you want to
Using USB memory device_ 90
scan another page.
5. To scan another page, press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes and
press OK. Load an original and press Start.
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to highlight No and press OK.
6. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device
from the machine.
Customizing Scan to USB
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to
USB job.
1. Press Scan/Email on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Feature and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight USB Feature and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight the setting you want and press OK.
You can set the following options:
•Scan Size: Sets the image size
•Original Type: Sets the original document’s type
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution
•Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,
you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple
pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in
Scan Color.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status highlights and press
OK.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options.
8. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You can change the default scan settings. For details, see "Changing the
default scan settings" on page 77.
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.
Direct Print option supported file types:
•PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible. PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check
box when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN
file, rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion
can be printed directly from USB memory device. (See "Printing to a file
(PRN)" on page 65.)
If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout
would be different .
•BMP: BMP Uncompressed
•TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
•JPEG: JPEG Baseline
•PDF: PDF 1.4 and below
To print a document from a USB memory device:
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine. If one has already been inserted, press Direct USB.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight USB Print and press OK.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on
it.
3. Press the up/down arrow until the folder or file you want highlights and
press OK.
If you see + in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or
folders in the selected folder.
4. If you selected a file, skip to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press the up/down arrow until the file you want
highlights and press OK.G
5. Press the up/down arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or
enter the number.
6. Press OK or Start to start printing the selected file.
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
7. To print another document, press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes and
press OK. Repeat from step 3.
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to highlight No and press OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
BACKING UP DATA
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power
failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect your Address Book
entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB
memory device.
Backing up data
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Export Setting and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights.
•Address Book: Backs up all Address Book entries.
•Setup Data: Backs up all system settings.
7. Press OK to begin backing up the data.
The data is backed up to the USB memory.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Restoring data
1. Insert a USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the
USB memory port.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Import Setting and press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the data type you want highlights and
press OK.
7. Press the up/down arrow until the file containing the data you want to
restore highlights and press OK.
8. To restore the backup file to the machine, press the left/right arrow to
highlight Yes and press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
MANAGING USB MEMORY
DYou can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or
all at once by reformatting the device.
Using USB memory device_ 91
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot
be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data
before deleting it.
Deleting an image file
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Direct USB on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight File Manage and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Delete and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the folder or file you want highlights and
press OK.
If you see + in the front of a folder name, there are one or more
files or folders in the selected folder.
If you selected a file, the display shows the size of the file for about 2
seconds. Go to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press the up/down arrow until the file you want
to delete highlights and press OK.
6. To delete file, press the up/down arrow to highlight Yes and press OK.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Formatting a USB memory device
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Direct USB on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight File Manage and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Format and press OK.
5. To format USB memory device, Press the up/down arrow to highlight
Yes and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Viewing the USB memory status
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Direct USB on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Check Space and press OK.
The available memory space appears on the display.
4. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Machine status and advanced feature_ 92
11.machine status and advanced feature
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced
machine setup. Read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.
This chapter includes:
•Fax setup
•Copy setup
•Scan setup
•Printing a report
•Clearing memory
•Network
•Menu overview
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
FAX SETUP
Changing the fax setup options
Your machine provides you with various user-selectable options for setting
up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences
and needs.
To change the fax setup options:
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the fax setup item you want highlights and
press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and press
OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status appears or enter the
value for the option you have selected, and press OK.
7. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Sending
Receiving
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Redial Times You can specify the number of redial attempts. If
you enter 0, the machine will not redial.
Redial Term Your machine can automatically redial a remote
fax machine if it was busy. You can set an
interval between attempts.
Prefix Dial You can set a prefix of up to five digits. This
number dials before any automatic dial number
is started. It is useful for accessing a PABX
exchange.
ECM Mode This mode helps with poor line quality and
makes sure any faxes you send are sent
smoothly to any other ECM-equipped fax
machine. Sending a fax using ECM may take
more time.
Send Report You can set your machine to print a confirmation
report showing whether a transmission was
successful, how many pages were sent, and
more. The available options are On,Off, and
On-Error, which prints only when a transmission
is not successful.
Image TCR This function allows users to know what fax
messages have been sent by showing sent
messages in the transmission report.
The first page of the message is turned into an
image file than is printed on the transmission
report so the users can see what messages
have been sent.
However, you can not use this function when
sending fax without saving the data in the
memory.
Dial Mode This setting may not be available depending on
your country. If you cannot reach this option,
your machine does not support this feature.
You can set the dial mode for your machine to
either tone dialling or pulse dialling. If you have a
public telephone system or a private branch
exchnage(PBX) system, you may need to select
Pulse. Contact your local telephone company if
you are not sure which dial mode to use.
If you select Pulse, some phone system
features might not be available. It can also take
longer to dial a fax or phone number.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Receive Mode You can select the default fax receiving mode.
For details on receiving faxes in each mode, see
"Changing the receive modes" on page 83.
Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the
machine rings before answering an incoming
call.
Stamp RCV Name This option allows the machine to automatically
print the page number, and the date and time of
reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine status and advanced feature_ 93
Change Default
Auto Report
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.
For further details, see "Printing sent fax report automatically" on page 88.
COPY SETUP
Changing the copy setup options
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.
1. Press Copy on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the copy setup item you want highlights
and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want highlights and
press OK.
6. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want highlights and press
OK.
Rcv Start Code This code allows you to initiate fax reception
from an extension phone plugged into the EXT
socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up
the extension phone and hear fax tones, enter
the code. It is preset to *9* at the factory.
Auto Reduction When receiving a fax containing pages as long
as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper
tray, the machine can reduce the size of the
original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
Turn on this feature if you want to automatically
reduce an incoming page.
With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The
original will be divided and printed in actual size
on two or more pages.
Discard Size When receiving a fax containing pages as long
as or longer than the paper in your machine, you
can set the machine to discard a specific length
from the end of the received fax. The machine
will print the received fax on one or more sheets
of paper, minus the data that would have been
on the specified discard segment.
When the received fax contains pages larger
than the paper in your machine, and Auto
Reduction has been turned on, the machine will
reduce the fax to fit on the existing paper, and
nothing will be discarded.
Junk Fax Setup This setting may not be available depending on
your country. Using this feature, the system will
not accept faxes sent from remote stations
whose numbers are stored in the memory as
junk fax numbers. This feature is useful for
blocking any unwanted faxes.
When you turn on this feature, you can access
the following options to set junk fax numbers.
•Add: Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers.
•Delete: Allows you to delete the desired junk
fax number. If you select Delete All, Allows
you to delete all junk fax numbers.
DRPD Mode This mode enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different
telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set
the machine to recognize which ring patterns to
answer. For details about this feature, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on
page 84.
Duplex Print Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the
machine prints the received fax data, it prints
them on both sides of the paper. For details
about this feature, see "Printing received faxes
on both sides of the paper" on page 84.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the
appearance of the received document.
•Standard: Originals with normal sized
characters.
•Fine: Originals containing small characters
or thin lines or originals printed using a
dot-matrix printer.
•Super Fine: Originals containing extremely
fine detail. Super Fine mode is enabled only
if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super
Fine resolution.
• For memory transmission, Super
Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically
changed to Fine.
• When your machine is set to Super
Fine resolution and the fax
machine with which you are
communicating does not support
Super Fine resolution, the machine
transmits using the highest
resolution mode supported by the
other fax machine.
•Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of
gray or photographs.
•Color Fax: Originals with colors. Sending a
color fax is enabled only if the machine with
which you are communicating supports color
fax reception and you send the fax manually.
In this mode, memory transmission is not
available.
Darkness You can select the default contrast mode to fax
your originals lighter or darker.
Machine status and advanced feature_ 94
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6, as needed.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Duplex Print
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper.
For further details, see "Copying on both sides of originals" on page 72.
Change Default
SCAN SETUP
Changing the scan setup options
To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up
default scan settings for each scan type.
1. Press Scan/Email.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Setup and press OK.
4. Press OK when Change Default highlights .
5. Press the up/down until the scan type you want highlights and press OK.
6. Press the up/down until the scan setting option you want highlights and
press OK.
Setting option is the same for each scan type.
7. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status highlights and press
OK.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set other setting options.
9. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
PRINTING A REPORT
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etc.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reports and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the report or list you want to print
highlights and press OK.
To print all reports and lists, select All Report.
5. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.
The selected information prints out.
You can also print the machine's status information and browse status
with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the Web browser on your
networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When
SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print
information.
CLEARING MEMORY
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s memory.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
#of Copies You can enter the number of copies using the
number keypad.
Copy Collation You can set the machine to sort the copy job.
For further details, see "Deciding the form of
copy output" on page 72.
Reduce/Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that
is easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images.
Original Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the
document type for the current copy job.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Scan Size Sets the image size.
Original Type Sets the original document’s type.
Resolution Sets the image resolution.
Scan Color Sets the color mode.
Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be
saved. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can select
to scan multiple pages.
Depending on the selected scan type, this
option may not appear.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Configuration This list shows the status of the user-selectable
options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing settings.
Address Book This list shows all of the email addresses
currently stored in the machine’s memory.
Send Report This report shows the fax number, the number of
pages, the elapsed time of the job, the
communication mode, and the communication
results for a particular fax job.
You can set up your machine to automatically
print a transmission confirmation report after
each fax job. (See "Sending" on page 92.)
Sent Report This report shows information on the faxes and
emails you have recently sent.
You can set the machine to automatically print
this report every 50 communications. (See
"Sending" on page 92.)
Fax Rcv Report This report shows information on the faxes you
have recently received.
Schedule Jobs This list shows the documents currently stored
for delayed faxes along with the starting time
and type of each operation.
JunkFax Report This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk
fax numbers. To add or delete numbers to or
from this list, access the Junk Fax Setup menu.
(See "Receiving" on page 92.)
Network Info. This list shows information on your machine’s
network connection and configuration.
User Auth List This list shows authorized users who are
allowed to use the email function.
Machine status and advanced feature_ 95
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Clear Setting and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the item you want to clear highlights and
press OK.
5. Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm clearing.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 to clear another item.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
NETWORK
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing
that, you must have the relevant information concerning the type of network
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to
use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine to the
network.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want highlights and
press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want highlights and press
OK.
5. Repeat steps 3 through 4, as needed.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
All settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and
resets all of your settings to the factory default.
Fax Setup Restores all of the fax options to the factory
default.
Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory
default.
Scan Setup Restores all of the scan options to the factory
default.
System Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory
default.
Network Setup Restores all of the network options to the factory
default.
Address Book Clears all of the email address entries stored in
memory.
Sent Report Clears all records of sent faxes and emails.
Fax Rcv Report Clears all records of received faxes.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
TCP/IP Select appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment.
Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed.
WirelessaConfigure the wireless network environments.
Clear Settings Reverts the network settings to the default
values.
Network Info. This list shows information on your machine’s
network connection and configuration.
a. This menu only appears when an optional wireless network interface
has been installed.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine status and advanced feature_ 96
MENU OVERVIEW
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine
or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
Menu.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
ITEMS OPTION
Fax Feature Darkness
Resolution
Multi Send
Delay Send
Priority Send
Forward
Secure Receive
Add Page
Cancel Job
Fax Setup Sending
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Send Report
Image TCR
Dial Mode
Receiving
Receive Mode
Ring to Answer
Stamp RCV Name
Rcv Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Junk Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
Duplex Print
Change Default
Resolution
Darkness
Auto Report
Copy Feature Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Layout
Copy Setup Duplex Print
Change Default
# of Copies
Copy Collation
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Scan Feature USB Feature
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
Email Feature
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
FTP Feature
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
SMB Feature
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Setup Change Default
USB Default
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
Email Default
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
FTP Default
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
SMB Default
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
ITEMS OPTION
Machine status and advanced feature_ 97
System Setup Machine Setup
Machine ID
Machine Fax No.
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Language
Default Mode
Power Save
Scan Power Save
Timeout
Job Timeout
Altitude Adjust
Auto Continue
Auto Tray Switch
Toner Save
Import Setting
Export Setting
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Source
Tray Confirm
Sound/Volume
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Speaker
Ringer
Reports
All Report
Configuration
Address Book
Send Report
Sent Report
Fax Rcv Report
Schedule Jobs
JunkFax Report
Network Info.
User Auth List
Maintenance
CLR Empty Msg
Supplies Life
Toner Low Alert
Serial Number
Paper Stacking
Clear Setting
All Settings
Fax Setup
Copy Setup
Scan Setup
System Setup
Network Setup
Address Book
Sent Report
Fax Rcv Report
ITEMS OPTION
Network TCP/IP
DHCP
BOOTP
Static
IP Address
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Ethernet Speed
Auto
10M Half
10M Full
100M Half
100M Full
Wireless
WLAN Setting
Wizard
Custom
WLAN Default
WLAN Signal
Clear Settings
Network Info.
ITEMS OPTION
Machine status and advanced feature_ 98
Management tools_ 99
12.management tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
This chapter includes:
•Introducing useful management tools
•Using SyncThru™ Web Service
•Using the Smart Panel program
•Smarthru Office
•Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
INTRODUCING USEFUL MANAGEMENT TOOLS
The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.
•"Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 99.
•"Using the Smart Panel program" on page 100.
•"Smarthru Office" on page 101.
•"Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator" on page 102.
USING SYNCTHRU™ WEB SERVICE
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via
SyncThru™Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™Web
Service to:
•View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
•Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
•Change printer preference.
•Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
•Get support for using the machine.
To access SyncThru™Web Service:
1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
SyncThru™Web Service overview
•Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your
machine. You can check things, such as the machine’s IP address,
remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and
so on. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on.
•Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by
your machine.
•Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the
network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, enabling
Ether Talk and so on.
•Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by
upgrading firmware and setting security information.
•Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending
email. You can also connect to SEC website or download drivers by
selecting Link.
E-mail Notification Setup
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option.
By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and
SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or
machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This
option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator.
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup.
4. Set required settings.
Set SMTP server information and other settings to use E-mail
notification function.
After setting the network environment, select the recipient list. And just
by clicking a radio button, you can select in what case you want to
receive an alert.
5. Click Apply.
Management tools_ 100
Setting the contact information
Set the machine administrator information and this setting is necessary to
use E-mail notification option.
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. Select Support.
4. Enter the name of machine administrator, phone number, location or
E-mail address..
5. Click Apply.
If the firewall is activated, the E-mail may not be sent successfully.
In that case, contact the a network administrator.
USING THE SMART PANEL PROGRAM
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine
status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. Smart Panel is
installed automatically when you install the machine software.
To use this program, you need the followingGsystem requirements:
• Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with
your machine. (See "System requirements" on page 33.)
• Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
• Linux. Check for Linux systems that are compatible with your
machine. (See "System requirements" on page 33.)
• Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML
Help.
If you need to know the exact model name of your machine, you can
check the supplied software CD.
Understanding Smart Panel
If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Smart
Panel.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel
icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux).
You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select
Programs or All Programs > your printer driver name > Smart Panel.
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine,
first select the correct machine model you want in order to access
the corresponding Smart Panel.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart
Panel icon and select your machine.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in
use.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the
level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of
information. You can also change settings.
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide
Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.
Windows Double-click this icon in Windows.
Macintosh Click this icon in Mac OS X.
Linux Click this icon in Linux.
1
Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner
cartridge(s). The machine and the number of toner
cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ
depending on the machine in use. Some machines
do not have this feature.
2Buy Now Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
3
User’s Guide View User’s Guide.
This button changes to Troubleshooting
Guide when error occurs. You can directly
open troubleshooting sectionGin the user’s
guide.
4
Printer
Setting
Configure various machine settings in the Printer
Settings Utility window. Some machines do not
have this feature.
If you connect your machine to a network,
the SyncThru™ Web Service window
appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility
window.
5
Driver Setting Set all of the machine options you need in the
Printer Preferences window. This feature is
available only for Windows. (See "Opening
printing preferences" on page 61.)
Management tools_ 101
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options
window.
SMARTHRU OFFICE
The supplied software CD provides you withGSmarThru Office. SmarThru
OfficeGoffers you convenient features to use with your machine.
Starting SmarThru Office
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office:
1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly
connected to each other.
2. Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the SmarThru
Office icon on your desktop.
3. Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct
buttons include: Categories,Binder,Life Cycle,Scan and OCR,
Fix and Enhance, and Samsung Website. You can disable this
menu by checking “Do not show this diaglog again”.
4. The SmarThru Office appears.
For more information about SmarThru Office, click Help > SmarThru
Office help. The SmarThru Office Help window appears; you can view
on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar
to activate the SmarThru OfficeGlauncher.
Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Office.
Before you begin the uninstall, ensure that all applications are closed
on your computer.
a) From theStart menu, select ProgramsGor All Programs.
b) Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall SmarThru
Office.
c) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read the
statement and click OK.
d) Click Finish.
Using SmarThru Office
Scanning
1. Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar
to activate the SmarThru OfficeGlauncher.
2. Click the scanning icon to open the scanning window.
3. Scan Setting window opens.
Click Advanced button to set more scan options.
4. Set scan settings and click Scan.
Printing
1. Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar
to active the SmarThru Office launcher.
2. Click the printing icon to open the printing window..
3. Select the file you want to print.
4. Select the machine you want to use for printing.
5. Click Print to start the job.
Sending a file via fax
You can fax while working on SmarThru Office.
1. Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar
to active the SmarThru Office launcher.
2. Click the faxing icon to open the faxing window.
3. Set fax settings and click Send Fax.
•Select Fax Machine: Choose whether the machine is connected
locally or via network. If the machine is in network, click Browse
to insert the IP address and other information.
•Pages Ready: Select file you want to fax. Click Add.
•Recipients: Click Add to enter the fax number.
•Cover page: If you need a cover page, enter the values for the
options. If not, click Skip Cover Page.
•Fax Settings: If the original document is faded or not vivid, click
Fine. In this case, the fax speed could be low.
1Select
Scanner
Allows you to select between the Local or Network
scanner.
2Select
Profile
Allows you to save settings frequently used for
future use. Click New ProfileGto save the setting.
3Scan
Settings
Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size
and Paper Source.
4Scan To Allows you to customize settings for File Name
and location to send scanned data.
Management tools_ 102
Sending a file to FTP
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru
Office.
1. Double-click the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.
2. Select the file to send to FTP.
3. Select File > Send to > Send By FTP.
4. Send By FTP window opens.
5. Add your file and click Upload.
Email
You can send email while working on SmarThru Office.
You need an email client program, such as Outlook Express, to
send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for sending email may
differ depending on email client program you are using.
1. Double-click the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.
2. Select the file to send to Email.
3. Select File > Send to>Send By E-mail.
4. An email client opens.
5. Type in necessary information and send your email.
USING THE LINUX UNIFIED DRIVER
CONFIGURATOR
The supplied software CD provides you with the Linux Unified Driver
package for using your machine with a Linux computer.
Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring
machine devices. Since a machine device combines the printer and
scanner, the Linux Unified Driver Configurator provides options logically
grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also a special machine
port option responsible for the regulation of access to a machine printer and
scanner via a single I/O channel.GAlso, you can monitor a number of
machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Linux Unified Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktopU
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration
window.
To use the on screen help, click Help.
3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver
Configurator.
Printers configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printers tab
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the
machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
The printer control buttons are, as follows:
•Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
•Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.
1Printers
Configuration
2Scanners
Configuration
3Ports
Configuration
1Switches to Printers configuration.
2Shows all of the installed machine.
3Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.
Management tools_ 103
•Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
•Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default
machine.
•Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
•Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is
working properly.
•Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.
Classes tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.
•Refresh: Renews the classes list.
•Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
•Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.
Scanners configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of
installed Samsung machine devices, change device properties, and scan
images.
•Properties: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a
document.
Ports configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of
each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner
has terminated the job for any reason.
1Shows all of the machine classes.
2Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the
class.
1Switches to Scanners configuration.
2Shows all of the installed scanners.
3Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.
1Switches to Ports configuration.
2Shows all of the available ports.
Management tools_ 104
•Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
•Release port: Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port
or USB port. Since the machine device contains more than one device
(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of
“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing
mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The
drivers talk to their devices via so-called machine ports. The current
status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration.
The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of
the machine device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new machine device onto your system, it is strongly
recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the
new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for
machine’s functionality. For machine scanners, I/O ports are being
chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied
by default.
3Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status
Maintenance_ 105
13.maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes:
•Printing a machine report
•Finding the serial number
•Cleaning a machine
•Storing the toner cartridge
•Tips for moving & storing your machine
PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT
You can print the machine's information and job report.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reports and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow until the report or list you want to print
appears.press OK.
To print all reports and lists, select All Report.
5. Press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes at the Printing? prompt and
press OK.
You can use SyncThru™ Web Service to print the machine's
configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in the
networked computer and type the machine's IP address. When
SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print
Information.
FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER
When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, the
machine’s serial number by taking the following steps:
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Serial Number and press OK.
5. Check your machine’s serial number.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
CLEANING A MACHINE
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty
enviroment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best
printing condition and use your machine longer.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with
toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with
water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the
air and might be harmful to you.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth
slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the
machine.
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate
inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and
reduces these problems.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to
cool down.
2. Open the front door and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean flat
surface
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to
light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of
paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner
cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching
this area.
Maintenance_ 106
3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the
toner cartridge area.
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage
the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents
such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can
occur and cause damage to the machine.
4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the top of the cartridge
compartment and gently clean the glass with a swab.
5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front door.
6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and the document feeder glass
until it is clean and dry.
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean
and dry.
5. Close the scanner lid.
STORING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
To get the best, print quality from the toner cartridge, keep the following
guidelines in mind:
•Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until ready to use.
•Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty does not cover
damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.
•Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine.
Expected cartridge life
The life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print
jobs require. The actual number may also be different depending on the
print density of the pages you print on, and the number of pages may be
affected by the operating environment, printing interval, media type, and
media size. If you print a lot of graphics, you may need to change the
cartridge more often.
TIPS FOR MOVING & STORING YOUR MACHINE
•When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise,
the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can
cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.
•When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding
the machine securely.
•When moving the machine or when machine is not in use for a long time,
lock the scanner lock.
1Scanner lid
2Scanner glass
3Document feeder
glass
4White sheet
Troubleshooting_ 107
14.troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
•Redistributing toner
•Clearing original document jams
•Tips for avoiding paper jams
•Clearing paper jams
•Understanding display messages
•Solving other problems
REDISTRIBUTING TONER
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•White streaks or light printing occurs.
•Toner is Low. Order new one appears on the display.
•The Status LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing
the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light
printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.
3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into
the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into
place completely.
5. Close the front door. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
CLEARING ORIGINAL DOCUMENT JAMS
When an original jams while passing through the document feeder, a
warning message appears on the display screen.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly
and gently.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or
mixed paper-type originals.
Troubleshooting_108
1. Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.
2. Open the document feeder cover.
3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.
If you see no paper in this area, go to step 5.
4. Close the document feeder cover. Reload the pages you removed, if
any, in the document feeder.
5. Open the scanner lid.
6. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
7. Close the scanner lid. Load the removed pages back into the document
feeder.
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER CURLS
1. Open the rear door.
2. Pull down the pressure lever on each side about 45 degrees.
3. Close the rear door.
If the rear door does not close, you have pull down the pressure
lever too much.
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines.
•Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See
"Loading paper in the tray" on page 55.)
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
•Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
•Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
1scanner lid
Troubleshooting_ 109
•Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
•Do not mix paper types in a tray.
•Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 59.)
•Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in
the tray, or facing up in the multi-purpose tray.
CLEARING PAPER JAMS
When a paper jam occurs, a warning message appears on the display
screen.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and
gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the
jam.
In tray 1
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front door. The jammed paper is automatically
ejected from the machine.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2. Pull out tray 1 .
3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge. (See
"Inside the machine" on page 110.)
4. Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing
automatically resumes.
In optional tray 2
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Pull out optional tray 2.
2. Remove the jammed paper from the machine.
If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to the next step.
3. Pull tray 1 half-way out.
4. Pull the paper straight up and out.
5. Insert the trays back into the machine. Printing automatically resumes.
In the multi-purpose tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
Troubleshooting_ 110
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
2. Open and close the front door to resume printing.
Inside the machine
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the
machine.
1. Open the front door and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it
down.
2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front door. Printing
automatically resumes.
In exit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front door. The jammed paper is automatically
ejected from the machine.
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.
2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.
If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when
you pull, stop and go to the next step.
3. Open the rear door.
4. If you see the jammed paper, pull down the pressure levers on each side
and remove the paper. Skip to step 9.
If you still do not see the paper, go to the next step.
Troubleshooting_ 111
5. Release the strip, the rear door stopper and fully open the rear door, as
shown.
6. Unfold the duplex guide fully and release the pressure lever on each
side.
7. While pushing the fuser lever to the right, open the fuser door.
8. Pull the jammed paper out.
9. Return the lever, door, strip, and guide to their original position.
10. Close the rear door. Printing automatically resumes.
In the duplex unit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, a paper jam may occur. Make
sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.
1. Pull the duplex unit out of the machine.
2. Remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit.
If the paper does not come out with the duplex unit, remove the paper
from the bottom of the machine.G
Troubleshooting_ 112
Insert the duplex unit into the machine.
If you still do not see the paper, go to the next step.
3. Open the rear door.
4. Unfold the duplex guide fully.
5. Pull the jammed paper out.
6. Fold the duplex guide and close the rear door.
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s
status or errors. Some error messages are shown with graphics to help you
troubleshoot problem.
Checking display messages
1. When errors occur, Check Status appears on the display and press
OK.
2. Check the display message to see what kind of error has occured.
If several messages appear, press the up/down arrow to highlight the
message you want solve.
3. Press OK on the control panel.
Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their
meaning, and solve the problem, if necessary.
• If Check Status still appears, repeat above steps.
• If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.
• When you call for service, provide the service representative with
the contents of display message.
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on
options or models.
• [xxx] indicates the media type.
• [zzz] indicates the paper size.
• [yyy] indicates the tray.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
BOOTP problem
BOOTP has a
problem.
Reconfigure
DHCP/static IP
There is a problem
with the network.
Check your network
environment, or contact
your network
administrator.
BOOTP problem
BOOTP has a
problem.
Switching to Auto
IP
There is a problem
with the network.
Check your network
environment, or contact
your network
administrator.
Connection Error Connection with the
SMTP server failed.
Check the server
settings and the network
cable.
Data Read Fail
Check USB key
Time expired while
reading date.
Try again.
Data Write Fail
Check USB key
Storing to the USB
memory failed.
Check the available
USB memory space.
DHCP problem
DHCP has a
problem.
Reconfigure
BOOTP/static IP
There is a problem
with the network.
Check your network
environment, or contact
your network
administrator.
DHCP problem
DHCP has a
problem.
Switching to Auto
IP
There is a problem
with the network.
Check your network
environment, or contact
your network
administrator.
Troubleshooting_ 113
Door is open.
Close it
The front door is not
securely latched.
Close the front door until
it locks into place.
Enter Again You entered an
unavailable item.
Enter the correct item
again.
File Format is
Not Supported
The selected file
format is not
supported.
Use the correct file
format.
Group Not
Available
You have tried to
select a group location
number where only a
single location
number can be used,
such as when adding
locations for a multiple
send operation.
Use a speed dial
number or dial number
manually using the
number keypad.
IP Conflict
This IP address
conflicts with that
of other system
The IP address is
used elsewhere.
Check the IP address or
obtain a new IP address.
Jam bottom of
duplex
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
Clear the jam. (See "In
the duplex unit area" on
page 111.)
Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in
exit area.
Clear the jam. (See "In
exit area" on page 110.)
Jam inside
Machine
Paper has jammed
inside the machine.
Clear the jam. (See
"Inside the machine" on
page 110.)
Jam top of duplex Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
Clear the jam. (See "In
the duplex unit area" on
page 111.)
Junk Fax Error
Junk Fax
Job Cancelled
The machine has
received a fax from
which is registered as
a junk fax.
The received fax data
will be
deleted.Reconfirm junk
fax setup. (See
"Receiving" on page 92.)
Line Busy
The line is already
engaged.
Try later
The receiving fax
machine did not
answer or the line is
already engaged.
Try again after a few
minutes.
Line Error
The Fax Line has a
problem.
Try again
Your machine cannot
connect with the
receiving fax machine
or has lost contact
because of a problem
with the phone line.
Try again. If the problem
persists, wait an hour or
so for the line to clear
again. Or, turn the ECM
mode on (See "Sending"
on page 92.)
Mail Size Error
Mail exceeds than
server support
The mail size is larger
than the supported
size by SMTP server.
Divide your mail or
reduce the resolution.
Mail Size Error
One Page is
Too Large
Single page data
exceeds the
configured mail size.
Reduce the resolution
and try again.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Memory Full
Cancel | Start
The memory is full. Press the left/right arrow
to highlight Cancel or
Start, then press OK. If
you select Cancel , the
machine stops the fax
job. If you select Start,
the machine only sends
scanned documents of
the fax job.
Memory Full
Divide the Job
The memory is full. Split the transmission
into more than one
operation.
Memory Full
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax job
The memory is full. Print or remove the
received fax data in the
memory.
Network Error
There is a problem
with the network.
There is a problem
with the network.
Check the network. If
the problem persists,
ask the system
administrator or the
person who has set up
your local network..
Network Problem
Network cable is
not connected.
Check it
The machine is not
connected with a
network cable.
Connect the machine to
the network with a
network cable.
Network Problem
Network card is
not installed.
Check it
There is a problem on
the network interface.
Turn the power switch
off and on. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
No Answer
The remote fax
machine has not
answered
The remote fax
machine has not
answered after
several redial
attempts.
Try again. Verify the
number to ensure that a
fax can be received.
No such job You are performing an
Add Pages or Cancel
Job operation, but
there are no jobs
waiting.
Check the display to see
if there are any
scheduled jobs. The
display should indicate if
any scheduled jobs are
in Standby mode, for
example, Delay Fax.
Original paper Jam The load original has
jammed in the
document feeder.
Clear the jam. (See
"Clearing original
document jams" on
page 107.)
Output bin Full
Output bin Full.
Remove printed
paper
The document output
tray is full.
The document output
tray can hold up to 150
sheets of plain paper.
Once the paper is
removed from the
document output tray,
the printer resumes
printing.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 114
Paper Empty in
[yyy]
Paper is empty
in [yyy].
Load paper
There is no paper in
the tray.
Load paper in the tray.
(See "Loading paper in
the tray" on page 55.)
Paper Jam in MP
tray
Paper has jammed in
the multi-purpose tray
area.
Clear the jam. (See "In
the multi-purpose tray"
on page 109.)
Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in
the tray1 area.
Clear the jam. (See "In
tray 1" on page 109.)
Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed in
the tray2 area.
Clear the jam. (See "In
optional tray 2" on
page 109.)
Paper mismatch
[yyy]
Load [zzz][xxx]
Continue Cancel
The paper size
specified in the printer
properties does not
match the paper you
are loading.
You can select the
option between
Continue or Cancel. If
you select Cancel , the
printing job will stop.
Load the correct paper
in the tray. If you select
Continue, printing job
will continue.
Pickup roller is
worn
[yyy] pickup roller
is worn.
Replace with new
one
The pickup roller has
reached the end of its
lifespan.
This message appears
when the pickup roller is
worn. Replace the
pickup roller with a new
one. Call for service.
Rear Door is open.
Close it
The rear door is not
securely latched.
Close the rear door until
it locks into place.
Retry Redial? The machine is
waiting for a specified
time interval to redial
a previously busy
station.
You can press OK to
immediately redial,
orStop/Clear to cancel
the redial operation.
Replace New Toner
Replace with New
Toner
The toner cartridge
has reached the end
of its lifespan.
Replace the toner
cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine toner
cartridge. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 125.)
Scanner locked The scanner module
is locked.
Unlock the CCD lock.
(See "Front view" on
page 28. ) Or turn off the
machine and on again. If
the problem persists,
call for service.
Self Diagnostics...
Please wait
The engine in your
printer is checking
some problems
detected.
Please wait a few
minutes.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Send Error
There is a problem
in DNS
There is a problem in
DNS.
Configure the DNS
setting.
Send Error
There is a problem
in POP3
There is a problem in
POP3.
Configure the POP3
setting.
Send Error
There is a problem
in SMTP
There is a problem in
SMTP.
Change to the available
server.
Send Error
There is a problem
in SMTP
authentication
There is a problem in
SMTP authentication.
Configure the
authentication setting.
Send Error
There is a problem
on the NIC Card
There is a problem on
network interface
card.
Turn the power switch
off and on. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Toner is empty
Toner is empty.
Replace with new
one
The toner cartridge
has reached the end
of its lifespan.
You can select the
option among Stop or
Continue. If you select
Stop, the machine stops
printing. If you select
Continue, the machine
keeps printing, but the
quality cannot be
guaranteed. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 125.)
Toner is worn
Toner is worn.
Replace with new
one
The toner cartridge is
near the end of its
lifespan.
You can select the
option among Stop or
Continue. If you select
Stop, the machine stops
printing. If you select
Continue, the machine
keeps printing, but the
quality cannot be
guaranteed. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 125.)
Toner is Low
Toner is Low.
Order new one
The toner cartridge is
getting empty.
Take out the toner
cartridge and thoroughly
shake it. By doing this,
you can temporarily
reestablish printing
operations. (See
"Redistributing toner" on
page 107.)
Toner Not
Compatible
Toner cartridge is
not compatible.
Check guide
The toner cartridge
you have installed is
not for your machine.
Install a
Samsung-genuine toner
cartridge designed for
your machine.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 115
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.
Paper feeding problems
Toner Not Installed
Toner cartridge is
not Installed.
Install it
The toner cartridge is
not installed.
Install the toner
cartridge.
Too many Faxes
Too may faxes are
received.
Print or remove
job.
Too many faxes are
received.
Print or remove received
fax.
Too many Faxes
Too may faxes are
queued.
Wait or remove
job.
Too many faxes are
queued to be sent.
Cancel reserved fax in
priority fax feature.
[yyy] empty
Load [zzz][xxx]
There is no paper in
the tray.
Load paper in the tray.
(See "Loading paper in
the tray" on page 55.)
Tray2 Not Installed
Tray2 is not
installed
The optional tray2 is
not installed.
Install the optional tray
2. If the optional tray 2 is
installed, check the
cable connecting the
machine and the
optional tray 2. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Tray2 has a
problem
Communication
problem occurred
with Tray2
The machine cannot
communicate the
optional tray 2.
Check the cable
connecting the machine
and the optional tray 2. If
the problem persists,
call for service.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Paper jams during
printing.
Clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper jams"
on page 109.)
Paper sticks
together.
•Check the maximum paper capacity of the
tray. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan
the paper.
•Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together.
Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and
weight.
Paper does not feed
into the machine.
•Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
•Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
•There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
•The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•If an original does not feed into the machine,
the document feeder rubber pad may require
to be replaced. Contact a service
representative.
The paper keeps
jamming.
•There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing
on special materials, use the multi-purpose
tray.
•An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine. (See "Print media
specifications" on page 133.)
•There may be debris inside the machine.
Open the front door and remove any debris.
•If an original does not feed into the machine,
the document feeder rubber pad may need to
be replaced. Contact a service representative.
Transparencies stick
together in the paper
exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed
for laser printers. Remove each transparency as
it exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew or
fail to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both
sides of the envelopes.
Troubleshooting_ 116
Printing problems
CONDITION POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
The machine
does not print.
The machine is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord
connections. Check the
power switch and the power
source.
The machine is not
selected as the
default machine.
Select your machine as your
default machine in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
•The front door is not closed. Close the front
door.
•Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See
"Clearing paper jams" on page 109.)
•No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See "Loading
paper in the tray" on page 55.)
•The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the
toner cartridge.
If a system error occurs, contact your service
representative.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine
cable and reconnect it.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable
to another computer that is
working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a
different machine cable.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer
setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has
more than one port, make
sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.
The machine may
be configured
incorrectly.
Check the Printing
Preferences to ensure that
all of the print settings are
correct. . (See "Opening
printing preferences" on
page 61.)
The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.
Repair the machine
software. (See "Installing
USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 34.)
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message
on the control panel to see if
the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a
service representative.
(Continued) The
machine does not
print.
The document size
is so big that the
hard disk space of
the computer is
insufficient to
access the print job.
Get more hard disk space
and print the document
again.
The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong paper
source.
The paper option
that was selected in
the Printing
Preferences may
be incorrect.
For many software
applications, the paper
source selection is found
under the Paper tab within
the Printing Preferences.
Select the correct paper
source. See the printer
driver help screen. (See
"Opening printing
preferences" on page 61.)
A print job is
extremely slow.
The job may be
very complex.
Reduce the complexity of
the page or try adjusting the
print quality settings.
Half the page is
blank.
The page
orientation setting
may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation
in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the
tray.
Or, ensure that the paper
size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper
selection in the software
application settings you use.
CONDITION POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 117
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the
problem.
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
The machine cable
is loose or
defective.
Disconnect the machine
cable and reconnect. Try a
print job that you have
already printed successfully.
If possible, attach the cable
and the machine to another
computer that you know
works and try a print job.
Finally, try a new machine
cable.
The wrong printer
driver was selected.
Check the application’s
printer selection menu to
ensure that your machine is
selected.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from
another application.
The operating
system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine
off and back on again.
If you are in a DOS
environment, the
font setting for your
machine may be
set incorrectly.
Change the language
setting. (See "Changing the
display language" on
page 49.)
Pages print, but
they are blank.
The toner cartridge
is defective or out of
toner.
Redistribute the toner, if
necessary.
If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.
The file may have
blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that
it does not contain blank
pages.
Some parts, such
as the controller or
the board, may be
defective.
Contact a service
representative.
The machine
does not print
PDF file correctly.
Some parts of
graphics, text, or
illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility
between the PDF
file and the Acrobat
products.
Printing the PDF file as an
image may enable the file to
print. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat
printing options.
It will take longer to
print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
CONDITION POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
The print quality
of photos is not
good. Images are
not clear.
The resolution of
the photo is very
low.
Reduce the photo size. If
you increase the photo size
in the software application,
the resolution will be
reduced.
Before printing,
the machine
emits vapor near
the output tray.
Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.
This is not a problem. Just
keep printing.
The machine
does not print
special- sized
paper, such as
billing paper.
Paper size and
paper size setting
do not match.
Set the correct paper size in
the Custom Paper Size
Settings in the Paper tab in
the Printing Preferences.
(See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 61.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Light or faded print •If a vertical white streak or faded area
appears on the page, the toner supply is low.
You may be able to temporarily extend the
toner cartridge life. (See"Redistributing toner"
on page 107.) If this does not improve the
print quality, install a new toner cartridge.
•The paper may not meet paper specifications;
for example, the paper may be too moist or
rough. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•If the entire page is light, the print resolution
setting is too low or the toner save mode is
on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the
toner save mode off. See the help screen of
the printer driver.
•Acombination of faded or smeared defects
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning. (See "Cleaning the inside" on
page 105.)
•The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. (See "Cleaning the
inside" on page 105.)
Toner specks •The paper may not meet specifications; for
example, the paper may be too moist or
rough. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the
inside of your machine. Contact a service
representative.
•The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a
service representative.
CONDITION POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Troubleshooting_ 118
Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur
randomly on the page:
•A single sheet of paper may be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
•The moisture content of the paper is uneven
or the paper has moist spots on its surface.
Try a different brand of paper. (See "Print
media specifications" on page 133.)
•The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject
toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
•Change the printer option and try again. Go
to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
and set type to Thick. (See "Opening
printing preferences" on page 61.)
•If these steps do not correct the problem,
contact a service representative.
White Spots If white spots appear on the page:
•The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a
paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.
Clean the inside of your machine. (See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 105.).
•The paper path may need cleaning. (See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 105.)
Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
•The surface (drum part) of the toner
cartridge inside the machine has probably
been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge
and install a new one. (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 125.)
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
•The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. (See "Cleaning the
inside" on page 105.)
Color or Black
background
If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
•Change to a lighter weight paper. (See "Print
media specifications" on page 133.)
•Check the environmental conditions: very
dry conditions or a high level of humidity
(higher than 80% RH) can increase the
amount of background shading.
•Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 125.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
AaBbC
AaBbC
AaBbC
AaBbC
AaBbC
Toner smear If toner smears on the page:
•Clean the inside of the machine. (See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 105.)
•Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print
media specifications" on page 133.)
•Remove the toner cartridge and then, install
a new one. (See "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 125.)
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of
the page at even intervals:
•The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you
still have the same problem, remove the
toner cartridge and, instll a new one. (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 125.)
•Parts of the machine may have toner on
them. If the defects occur on the back of the
page, the problem will likely correct itself
after a few more pages.
•The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Background
scatter
Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
•The paper may be too damp. Try printing
with a different batch of paper. Do not open
packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
•If background scatter occurs on an envelope,
change the printing layout to avoid printing
over areas that have overlapping seams on
the reverse side. Printing on seams can
cause problems.
•If background scatter covers the entire
surface area of a printed page, adjust the
print resolution through your software
application or in Printing Preferences. (See
"Opening printing preferences" on page 61.)
Misformed
characters
•If characters are improperly formed and
producing hollow images, the paper stock
may be too slick. Try different paper. (See
"Print media specifications" on page 133.)
•If characters are improperly formed and
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit may
need service. (See "Cleaning the scan unit"
on page 106.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
A
Troubleshooting_ 119
Page skew •Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
•Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print
media specifications" on page 133.)
•Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too
loose against the paper stack.
Curl or wave •Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
•Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper
curl. (See "Print media specifications" on
page 133.)
•Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Wrinkles or
creases
•Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
•Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print
media specifications" on page 133.)
•Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts
are dirty
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the
machine. (See "Cleaning the inside" on
page 105.)
Solid Color or
Black pages
•The toner cartridge may not be installed
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
•The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new
one. (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 125.)
•The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBb
C
AaBbC
AaBbC
c
A
Loose toner •Clean the inside of the machine. (See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 105.)
•Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print
media specifications" on page 133.)
•Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 125.)
•If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black:
•If you are using transparencies, try another
type of transparency. Because of the
composition of transparencies, some
character voids are normal.
•You may be printing on the wrong surface of
the paper. Remove the paper and turn it
around.
•The paper may not meet paper
specifications. (See "Print media
specifications" on page 133.)
Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
•The toner cartridge may be installed
improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
•The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new
one. (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 125.)
•If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not
feed into the machine:
•Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
•Change the printer option and try again. Go
to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
and set type to Thin. (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 61.)
An unknown image
repetitively
appears on a few
sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination
occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an
altitude of 1,500 m (4,921 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality,
such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the
correct altitude setting to your machine. (See
"Altitude adjustment" on page 49.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
A
AaBbC
AaBbC
AaBbC
AaBbC
AaBbC
Troubleshooting_ 120
Copying problems Scanning problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTION
Copies are too light
or too dark
Use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten or
darken the backgrounds of copies. (See
"Changing the darkness" on page 70.)
Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appear on copies.
•If the defects are on the original, use
Darkness in Copy feature to lighten the
background of your copies. (See "Changing
the darkness" on page 70.)
•If there are no defects on the original, clean
the scan unit. (See "Cleaning the scan unit"
on page 106.)
Copy image is
skewed.
•Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the document
feeder.
•Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
Blank copies print
out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the document
feeder.
Image rubs off the
copy easily.
•Replace the paper in the tray with paper from
a new package.
•In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in
the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper
jams occur.
•Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh
supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
•Ensure that the paper is the proper paper
weight.
•Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper
remaining in the machine after a paper jam
has been cleared.
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than
expected before
running out of toner.
•Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or
heavy lines. For example, your originals may
be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
•The scanner lid may be left open while copies
are being made.
•Turn the machine off and back on.
CONDITON SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The scanner does not
work.
•Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or
face up in the document feeder.
•There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
•Check that the machine cable is connected
properly.
•Make sure that the machine cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
•Check that the scanner is configured
correctly. Check scan setting in the
SmarThru Office or the application you want
to use to make certain that the scanner job
is being sent to the correct port (for example,
USB001).
The unit scans very
slowly.
•Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
•Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
•Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.
Message appears on
your computer
screen:
•Device can’t be
set to the H/W
mode you want.
•Port is being used
by another
program.
•Port is Disabled.
•Scanner is busy
receiving or
printing data.
When the current
job is completed.,
try again.
•Invalid handle.
•Scanning has
failed.
•There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished.
•The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
•The machine cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
•The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
•Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, then restart
your computer.
•The USB cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
Troubleshooting_ 121
Fax problems
Samsung Scan Manager Problem
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when
several printer languages are used.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine is not
working, there is no
display, or the
buttons are not
working.
•Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
•Ensure that there is power being supplied to
the electrical outlet.
No dial tone. •Check that the phone line is properly
connected.
•Check that the phone socket on the wall is
working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored
in memory do not
dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in
memory correctly. Print a Addess Book list.
(See "Setting up address book" on page 86.)
The original does
not feed into the
machine.
•Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the
original is the right size, not too thick or thin.
•Make sure that the document feeder is firmly
closed.
•The document feeder rubber pad may need to
be replaced. Contact a service
representative.
Faxes are not
received
automatically.
•The receiving mode should be set to fax.
•Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
•Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem
The machine does
not send.
•Make sure that the original is loaded in the
document feeder or on the scanner glass.
•Check the fax machine you are sending to, to
see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax
has blank spaces or
is of poor-quality.
•The fax machine sending you the fax may be
faulty.
•Anoisy phone line can cause line errors.
•Check your machine by making a copy.
•The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace
the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 125.)
Some of the words
on an incoming fax
are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a
temporary document jam.
There are lines on
the originals you
sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
(See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 106.)
The machine dials a
number, but the
connection with the
other fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of
paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak
with the other machine operator and ask her/him
to solve out the problem.
Faxes do not store in
memory.
There may not be enough memory space to
store the fax. If the display indicating the
memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to
store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear
at the bottom of
each page or on
other pages, with a
small strip of text at
the top
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings
in the user option setting. For details about
paper settings. (See "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 59.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTION
Samsung Scan
Manager does not
work.
Check your system requirements. Samsung
Scan Manager works in Window and Macintosh
(See "System requirements" on page 33.)
PROBLEM POSSIBLE
CAUSE SOLUTION
PostScript file
cannot be printed.
The PostScript
driver may not be
installed correctly.
•Install the PostScript
driver. (See "Installing
USB connected
machine’s driver" on
page 34.)
•Print a configuration
page and verify that
the PS version is
available for printing.
•If the problem persists,
contact a service
representative.
“Limit Check Error”
report prints.
The print job was
too complex.
You might need to
reduce the complexity of
the page or install more
memory. (See "Installing
a memory module" on
page 126.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 122
Common Windows problems
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.
Common Linux problems
A PostScript error
page prints.
The print job may
not be PostScript.
Make sure that the print
job is a PostScript job.
Check to see whether
the software application
expected a setup or
PostScript header file to
be sent to the machine.
The optional tray is
not selected in the
driver.
The printer driver
has not been
configured to
recognize the
optional tray.
Open the PostScript
driver properties, select
the Device Settings tab,
and set the tray option of
the Installable Options
section to Installed.
When printing a
document in
Macintosh with
Acrobat Reader 6.0
or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
The resolution
setting in the printer
driver may not be
matched with the
one in Acrobat
Reader.
Make sure that the
resolution setting in your
printer driver matches
the one in Acrobat
Reader.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all
software from the printer’s startup group, then
restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows
and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout error
occurred” messages
appear.
These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes
printing. If the message appears in standby
mode or after printing has been completed,
check the connection and/or whether an error
has occurred.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE
CAUSE SOLUTION
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not print.
•Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and
switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of
available machines. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, open
Add new printer wizard to set up your
device.
•Check if the machine is started. Open
Printers configuration and select your
machine on the printers list. Look at the
description in the Selected printer pane. If its
status contains Stopped string, press the
Start button. After that normal operation of
the machine should be restored. The
“stopped” status might be activated when
some problems in printing occurred. For
instance, this could be an attempt to print a
document when the port is claimed by a
scanning application.
•Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional
components of machine (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” applications to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them at a time is allowed to gain control
over the device. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. You
should open ports configuration and select
the port assigned to your machine. In the
Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is
the case, you should either wait for
completion of the current job or press the
Release port button, if you are sure that the
present application is not functioning properly.
•Check if your application has special print
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified
in the command line parameter, then remove
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command
line parameter in the command item.
•The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet
Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket
printing instead of ipp or install a later version
of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
The machine does
not print whole
pages, and output is
printed on half the
page.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color
machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript
Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL
Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the
latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from
http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and
install it to solve this problem.
Troubleshooting_ 123
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Macintosh error messages.
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device
dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should
install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package
for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home
page. For the detailed information, refer to the
Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end
application.
If you wish to use another kind of scan
application, refer to application’s Help.
I encounter error
“Cannot open port
device file” when
printing a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.
Known versions of CUPS server break the print
job whenever print options are changed and
then try to restart the job from the beginning.
Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while
printing, the abrupt termination of the driver
keeps the port locked and unavailable for
subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try
to release the port by selecting Release port in
Port configuration window.
The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.
•Ensure your machine is attached to your
computer, connected properly via the USB
port, and is turned on.
•Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is
installed in your system. Open Unified Linux
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make
sure that driver with a name corresponding to
your machine's name is listed in the window.
•Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional
components of machine (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” applications to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them at a time is allowed to gain control
over the device. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. This
usually happens when starting a scan
procedure. An appropriate message box
appears.
To identify the source of the problem, open
the Ports configuration and select the port
assigned to your scanner, port's symbol
/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at
/dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to
/dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you
can see if the port is occupied by another
application. If this is the case, you should
either wait for completion of the current job or
press the Release port button, if you are sure
that the present port applicaton is not
functioning properly.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not scan.
•Ensure a document is loaded into the
machine, ensure your machine is connected
to the computer.
•If there is an I/O error while scanning.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not print PDF files
correctly. Some
parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations
are missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable
the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the
Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
The document has
printed, but the print
job has not
disappeared from
the spooler in Mac
OS X10.3.2.
Update your MAC OS to OS MAC OS X 10.3.3.
or higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the cover
page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover
page printing. The English alphabet and
numbers are displayed normally on the cover
page.
When printing a
document in
Macintosh with
Acrobat Reader 6.0
or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your
machine driver matches the one in Acrobat
Reader.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Supplies and accessories_ 124
15.supplies and accessories
This chapter provides information on purchasing suppliesS accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
•How to purchase
•Available supplies
•Available accessories
•Available maintenance parts
•Replacing the toner cartridge
•Necessary precautions to take when installing accessories
•Upgrading a memory module
•Checking replaceable’s lifespan
•Replacing the document feeder rubber pad
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your
sales representativesGto obtain the list of available accessories.
HOW TO PURCHASE
To order Samsung-authorized suppliesS accessories and, maintenance
parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
purchased your machineUGYou can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies,
select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service.
AVAILABLE SUPPLIES
When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of
supplies for your machine:
To replace a toner cartridgea (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 125.)
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s
lifespan may differ.
You must purchase supplies,Gincluding toner cartridges, in the same
country where you purchased your machine.GOtherwise, supplies will
be incompatable with your machine since the system configuration of
these vary from country to country.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s
performance and capacity.
AVAILABLE MAINTENANCE PARTS
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts
and to maintain your machine in top working condition, the following parts
will need to be replaced after printing the specified number of pages or
when the life span of each item has expired.
TYPE AVERAGE YIELDa
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
PART NAME
Standard yield Approx. 4,000 pages •MLT-D208S
•Region Ab:
MLT-D2082S
b.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus,
Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Italy, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.
High yield Approx. 10,000 pages •MLT-D208L
•Region Ab:
MLT-D2082L
ACCESSORY FUNCTION PART NAME
Memory module Extend your machine’s
memory capacity.
•CLP-MEM202: 256 MB
•CLP-MEM201: 128 MB
Optional tray 2 If you are experiencing
frequent paper supply
problems, you can
attach an additional 250
sheet tray. You can
print documents in
various sizes and types
of print materials.
SCX-S5635A
JScribe The port feature here is
the serial port,
embedded within your
machine, which enables
your machine to be
connected to an
external device using
JScribe technology.
SCX-KIT10J
IEEE 802.11 b/g
Wireless LAN
Allows you to connect
your printer to a
wireless network.
ML-NWA30L
PARTS AVERAGE YIELDaPART NAME
Document feeder
rubber pad
Approx. 20,000 pages RMO ADF
RUBBER
Transfer roller Approx. 70,000 pages ROLLER-TRANSF
ER
Supplies and accessories_ 125
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the
machine.
Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized
service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The
warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts after
their lifespan.
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
When the toner cartridge is empty:
•Toner is empty. Replace with new one appears on the display.
•The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Available supplies" on page 124.)
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
4. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly
inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
5. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into
the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into
place completely.
6. Close the front door. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
•Disconnect the power cord.
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external
accessories.
•Discharge static electricity.
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
•Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties.
After installing an accessory such as an optional tray, PS driver users
must do the additional setting. Go to the PS printer properties and set
the added accesorry activated.
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a
service component. Do not change it by yourself.
There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect
type. Dispose used batteries according to the instructions.
UPGRADING A MEMORY MODULE
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory
module slot to install additional memory.
The machine has two memory slots with a factory pre-installed memory
module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory capacity, you can
add a memory module to the vacant memory slot. It is strongly
recommended that you expand a memory module in the vacant memory
slot, and not by removing a pre-installed memory module. Your machine
Fuser unit Approx. 80,000 pages ELA UNIT-FUSER
Tray rubber pad Approx. 150,000 pages RPR-PAD
CASSETTE
Pickup roller Approx. 150,000 pages ROLLER-PICK UP
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connecting method, media type, media size and
job complexity.
PARTS AVERAGE YIELDaPART NAME
Supplies and accessories_ 126
has 128 MB memory capacity and you can add 128 or 256 MB, in that case,
the memory capacity expand up to 384 MB. Order information is provided
for additional memory module. (See "Available accessories" on page 124.)
Installing a memory module
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2. Grasp the control board cover and remove it.
3. Remove the new memory module from its bag.
4. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those
on an actual memory module and its slot.
5. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a 'click'.
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,
carefully try the previous procedure again.
6. Close the control board cover by aligning the groove on it with the notch
on the machine and sliding it.
7. Reconnect the power cord and machine cable. Turn on the machine.
If you use the PS driver, you must activate the added memory in the
PS driver properties.
Activating the added accessories in PS printer
properties
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.
1. Install the PS Driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver"
on page 34.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
•For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers.
3. Select the your machine’s PS driver and right-click to open Properties.
4. Select Device Settings.
5. Select the Installable Options section and set the necessary options.
6. Click OK.
INSTALLING A WIRELESS NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
The machine is equipped with a network interface which allows you to use
your machine on a network. You can also purchase a wireless network
interface card to enable the use of the machine in wireless network
environments.
Installing a wireless network interface card
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2. Grasp the control board cover and remove it.
3. Take out a new wireless interface card from its bag.
4. Align the connector on the wireless interface card with the connector on
the control board.
Push the wireless interface card firmly into the connector until it is
completely and securely in place.
Supplies and accessories_ 127
5. Close the control board cover by aligning the groove on it with the notch
on the machine and sliding it.
6. Plug back all the cables to the machine, and turn the machine on.
7. Set the wireless network environment. (See "Using a wireless network"
on page 42.)
CHECKING REPLACEABLE’S LIFESPAN
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the
number of pages the machine has printed. Replace the corresponding
parts, if necessary.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.
3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.
4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Supplies Life and press OK.
5. Press the up/down arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.
•Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.
•Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.
•ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF.
•Platen Scan:Displays the number of pages scanned using the
scanner glass.
•Transfer Belt: Displays the number of pages printed using the
transfer belt.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
REPLACING THE DOCUMENT FEEDER RUBBER
PAD
You will need to replace the document feeder rubber pad when there seems
to be a consistent problem with paper pickup or when its specified yield is
reached.
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Rotate the bushing on the right end of the document feeder roller toward
the document feeder and remove the roller from the slot.
3. Remove the document feeder rubber pad from the document feeder, as
shown.
4. Insert a new document feeder rubber pad into place.
1Connector
2Wireless
interface card
1Bushing
2Document
feeder roller
1Document
feeder rubber
pad
Supplies and accessories_ 128
5. Align the left end of the document feeder roller with the slot and push the
right end of the roller into the right slot. Rotate the bushing on the right
end of the roller toward the document input tray.
6. Close the document feeder cover.
Specifications_ 129
16.specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.
This chapter include:
•General specifications
•Printer specifications
•Scanner specifications
•Copier specifications
•Facsimile specifications
•Print media specifications
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
The symbol * optional feature depending on machines.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Document feeder capacity Up to 50 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Document feeder document size Width: 142 to 216 mm (5.6 x 8.5 inches)/ Length: 148 to 356 mm (5.8 x 14 inches)
Paper input capacity •Tray: 250 sheets for plain paper, 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
•Multi-purpose tray: 50 sheets for plain paper, 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
•Optional tray: 250 sheets for plain paper, 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
( See "Print media specifications" on page 133.)
Paper output capacity Output tray Face down: 150 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Rear door Face up: 1 sheet 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Power rating AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine.
Power consumption •Average operating mode: Less than 600 W
•Ready mode: Less than 80 W
•Power Save mode: Less than 18 W
•Power off mode: 1 W
Noise Levela•Ready mode: 26 dBA (Initial), 39 dBA (Long Term)
•Printing mode: 52 dBA
•Copying mode: 54 dBA
Default time to power save mode
from ready mode
30 Minutes
Boot-up timebLess than 55 seconds
Operating environment Temperature: 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH
Display 4-Line graphic LCD
Toner cartridge lifecStandard yield Average Cartridge Yield 4,000 standard pages.
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC
(Shipped with 4,000 pages Starter toner cartridge.)d
High yield Average Cartridge Yield 10,000 standard pages.
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC
Memory (Expandable)* 128 MB (Max. 384 MB)
Specifications_ 130
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
External dimension
(W x D x H)
466 x 435 x 458 mm
(18.3 x 17.1 x 18 inches) without optional tray
Weight
(Including consumables)
18.8 Kg (41.45 lbs)
Package weight Paper: 3.4 Kg (7.42 lbs)
Plastic: 1.1 Kg (2.42 lbs)
Duty cycle Up to 35,000 pages (Monthly)
Fusing temperature 180 °C (356 °F)
a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
b.Boot-up time is the time that takes from the power switch on to the ready mode.
c. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and
media size.
d.It varies depending on the product configuration.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Printing method Laser beam printing
Printing speeda
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size and job complexity.
Up to 33 ppm (A4), 35 ppm (Letter)
Duplex printing speed Up to 17 ipm (A4), 18 ipm (Letter)
First print out time 8.5 seconds (from ready)
Print resolution Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi effective output
Printer language PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF1.4, TIFF, Epson/IBM Pro (Israel only), KS/KSSM (Korea only)
OS compatibilityb
b.Visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software version.
•Windows: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista
•Various Linux OS ( See "Linux" on page 34.)
•Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3~10.5
Interface •High speed USB 2.0
•Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (Embedded type)
•802.11 b/g Wireless LAN (Optional)
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Specifications_ 131
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Compatibility TWAIN standard/WIA standard
Scanning method Color CCD
Resolutiona
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might differ.
TWAIN standard Up to 600 x 600 dpi (Up to 4,800 x 4,800 dpi by software enhancement)
WIA standard Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Scan to USB 100, 200, 300 dpi
Scan to PC 75, 150, 200, 300, 600 dpi
Scan to Email
Scan to FTP
Scan to SMB
100, 200, 300dpi
Network Scan File format PDF, TIFF, JPEGb
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.
Effective scanning length Scanner glass: 297 mm (11.7 inches)
Document feeder: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
Effective scanning width Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)
Color bit depth 24 bit
Mono bit depth 1 bit for lineart & halftone
8 bit for gray scale
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Copy Speeda
a.Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy.
Up to 33 cpm (A4), 35 cpm (Letter)
First copy out time Scanner glass: 10 seconds (from ready)
Document feeder: 13 seconds (from ready)
Copy resolution Text Scanner glass: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
Document feeder: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
Text/photo Scanner glass: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
Document feeder: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
Photo Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Document feeder: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
Zoom range Scanner glass: 25% to 400%
Document feeder: 25% to 200%
Specifications_ 132
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS
The fax feature may not be supported depending on machines.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Compatibility ITU-T G3
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX
Data coding MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
Modem speed 33.6 Kbps
Transmission speed Up to 3 seconds/pagea
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase “C” by ITU-T No. 1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.
Maximum document length 356 mm (14 inches)
Resolution •Standard: 203 x 98 dpi
•Fine: 203 x 196 dpi
•Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi
Memory 4 MB
Halftone 256 levels
Auto dialer up to 200 numbers
Specifications_ 133
PRINT MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS
PRINT MEDIA WEIGHTa/CAPACITYb
a.If media weight is over 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
TRAY1 / OPTIONAL TRAY MULTIPURPOSE TRAY
Plain paper Letter 215.9 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)
•250 sheets of 80g/m2(20 lb
bond)
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond)
•50 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lb bond)
Legal 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)
•150 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lb
bond)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive 184.2 x 266.7 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
A5 148.5 x 210 mm (5.85 x 8.27 inches)
A6 105 x 148.5 mm (4.13 x 5.85 inches) Not available in tray1 / optional
tray
Envelope Envelope Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 mm (3.88 x 7.5 inches) Not available in tray1 / optional
tray
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
•5 sheets stacking
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)
Thick paper Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb bond) 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb bond)
Thin paper Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb bond) 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb bond)
Transparency Letter, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 / optional
tray
138 to 146 g/m2 (36.81 to 38.91 lb
bond)
•5 sheets stacking
Labelsc
c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield)
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 / optional
tray
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond)
•5 sheets stacking
Card stock Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 / optional
tray
105 to 163 g/m2 ( 28 to 43lb bond)
•5 sheets stacking
Minimum size (custom) 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) Not available in tray1 / optional
tray
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 134
contact samsung worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER WEB SITE
ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com/ar
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com/au
AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
www.samsung.com/at
BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be
BRAZIL 0800-124-421
4004-0000
www.samsung.com/br
CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/ca
CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/cl
CHINA 800-810-5858
400-810-5858
010-6475 1880
www.samsung.com/cn
COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com.co
COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
CZECH
REPUBLIC
800-726-786 (800 -
SAMSUNG)
www.samsung.com/cz
Samsung Zrt., þeská organizaþní složka, Oasis
Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK 8-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/dk
ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com/latin
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.ee
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_r
u
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500
FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi
FRANCE 3260 SAMSUNG
08 25 08 65 65 (€ 0,15/min)
www.samsung.com/fr
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)
www.samsung.de
GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com/latin
HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com/latin
HONG KONG 3698 4698 www.samsung.com/hk
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/hu
INDIA 3030 8282
1800 110011
1-800-3000-8282
www.samsung.com/in
INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 www.samsung.com/id
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/it
JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com/jp
LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt
LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com/my
MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/mx
NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG(726-7864
€ 0,10/min)
www.samsung.com/nl
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)
www.samsung.com/nz
NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com/latin
NORWAY 3-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/no
PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/ph
POLAND 0-801-1SAMSUNG
(172678)
022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com/pl
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/pt
PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com/latin
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com/latin
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/sg
SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/sk
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG
(724-7864)
www.samsung.com/za
SPAIN 902-1-SAMSU(72678) www.samsung.com/es
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER WEB SITE
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 135
SWEDEN 075-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/se
SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
www.samsung.com/ch
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500
TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com/tw
THAILAND 1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
www.samsung.com/th
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/latin
TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr
U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726
www.samsung.com/ae
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/uk
U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/us
UKRAINE 8-800-502-0000 www.samsung.ua
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_r
u
VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com/latin
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com/vn
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER WEB SITE
Glossary_ 136
glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well
as mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards
Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g
802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band.
802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps.
802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave
ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that
connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local
area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of
WLAN radio signals.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and
white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file
format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to
prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of
the machine.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box
state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,
received fax data.
Glossary_ 137
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,
such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer
limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as
another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm
when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a
network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement
of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to
the peripheral (for example, a printer).
Glossary_ 138
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of
an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal
website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing
the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer
can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution
than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over
TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates
the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g.,
00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network
Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers
trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently
compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted
information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
Glossary_ 139
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches
from grits of a paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page
printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a
device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer
to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can
produce in one minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies
many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for
remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables
centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and
passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting)
concept to manage network access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated
Inter-process communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple,
text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network
(WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to
communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a
maximum length of 32 characters.
Glossary_ 140
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and which
part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a
TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can
be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE
802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP
provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as
it is transmitted from one end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless
(Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the
security features of WEP.
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small
business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the
wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop
devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a
wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.
Index_ 141
A
accessories
installing 125
ordering 124
adjusting
tray size 51
answering machine/fax 83
authentication
printing a report 94
auto continue setting 52
auto tray switch setting 52
B
backing up data 90
booklet printing 62
booklets 62
buttons
Power Saver 31
C
cleaning
inside 105
outside 105
scan unit 106
cleaning a machine 105
control panel 30
convention 24
copy setup 93
copy timeout setting 72
copying
adjusting darkness 70
basic copying 70
changing the copy setup 93, 94, 72
ID card copy 71
n-up copy 71
poster copy 71
reducing or enlarging copies 70
selecting the size of originals 70
D
date setting 49
default settings
changing the default settings 50
loading paper 50
setting a fax header 81
tray setting 59
display screen 30
document feeder 54
duplex printing
copy 72
print 62, 69
E
email address
group 74
individual 74
printing 74
searching 74
Entering
using the number keypad 50
error message 112
extension telephone 84
F
favorites settings, for printing 61
fax receiving
activating secure receive 84
changing the receive mode 83
DRPD mode 84
extension telephone 84
in answering machine/fax 83, 85
receiving in duplex 84
secure receiving 84
fax sending
delay sending 82
multi sending 82
redialing the last number 82
sending a fax 81, 83
fax setup 92, 94
faxing
address book 86, 85
changing receiving mode 83, 92
delaying a fax transmission 82
forwarding faxes 85
group dial 87
preparing to fax 81
receiving 83, 85, 83, 84, 82
sending 81, 83, 84, 81, 86
features 26
machine features 92, 129
PostScript driver 60
power saving feature 51, 133, 60
supplied software 32
font setting 52
front view 28
FTP, scan 75
G
glossary 136
group
email address for scanning 74
I
ID copy 71
individual
email addresses for scanning 74
information 9
J
jam
clearing paper 109
tips for avoiding paper jams 108
job timeout setting 52
L
language 49
LCD display
changing the display language 49
LED
machine status 31
power saver 31
understanding the status LED 31
Linux
common Linux problems 122
index
Index_ 142
driver installation for network connected
42, 35
printer properties 67
scanning 79, 33, 34
unifled driver configurator 102
loading
in the document feeder 54
originals on the scanner glass 53
paper in multi-purpose tray 56, 55
special media 57
M
Macintosh
common Macintosh problems 123
driver installation for network connected
41, 47, 35
printing 65
scanning 78, 37, 33
using SetIP 39, 43
maintenance parts 124
managing USB memory 90
memory
clearing memory 94
installing memory module 126
memory upgrading 125
menu overview 96
multi-purpose tray
loading 56
tips on using 56
using special media 57
N
network
driver installation
Linux 42
Macintosh 41, 47
Windows 40
installing environment 38
SetIP program 39, 43
setting up 38
wired network 38, 42
network setup 95
N-up copy 71
N-up printing
Macintosh 66
Windows 62
O
on hook dial
hardware 30
optional tray 124
loading paper 55
ordering 124
original document
clearing jam 107
loading
in the document feeder 54
on the scanner glass 53
original type
copying 70
overlay printing
create 64
delete 64
print 64
P
placing a machine
adjusting the altitude 49
spacing 32
poster, print 62
PostScript driver
features 60
troubleshooting 121
power saver
button 31
using power save mode 51
print media
card stock 58
envelope 57
guidelines 54
labels 58
output support 133
preprinted paper 59
setting the default tray and paper
in the computer 51
59, 57
transparency 58
print resolution set
Linux 67
print resolution, set
Macintosh 66
printer driver
features 60
printer preferences
Linux 67
printer properties 62
opening printer preferences 68
printing
changing the default print settings 64, 63
fitting your document to a selected paper
size 63
Linux 67
Macintosh 65
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Macintosh 66
Windows 62
poster 62
Windows 60
Macintosh 66
Windows 62, 69
65
using overlay 64, 63
printing a document
Linux 67
Macintosh 65
problems
copying problems 120
paper feeding problems 115, 117
R
rear view 29
regulatiory information 13
replacing
ADF rubber pad 127
resolution
faxing 85
S
safety
information 9
symbols 9
scan to email 73
scan to server 75
scanner
glass 53
lid 28, 53
scanner glass
loading documents 53
scanning
authentication 76
basic information 73
changing default settings 77, 50
for local connection 75
setting up 75
to email 73, 75
Linux 79
Macintosh 78
TWAIN 78
WIA 78
serial number 105
service center registeration
usb cable-connected machine 35
service contact numbers 134
Index_ 143
SetIP program 39, 43
Smart Panel
font setting 52
general information 100
specifications
copier 131
faximile 132
general 129
print media 133, 130
scanner 131
start button 30
stop button 30
storing email addresses
group 74
individual 74
supplies
available supplies 124
expected toner cartridge life 106
ordering 124
replacing toner cartridge 125
SyncThruTM Web Service
general information 99
T
time setting 49
to USB memory device 89
toner cartridge
expected life 106, 129
redistributing toner 107, 125
storage 106
toner save mode 51
tray
adjusting the width and length 55
changing the tray size 55
loading paper in multi-purpose tray 56
ordering an optional tray 124
setting the paper size and type 59
TWAIN, scan 78
U
USB cable
driver installation 34
how to scan 89, 90
port 29
USB memory
how to back up 90
USB memory device
port 28, 29, 90
W
watermark
create 63
delete 64
edit 64
print 63
WIA
scan 78
Windows
common Windows problems 122
driver installation for network connected
40, 34
printing 60
scanning 73, 36, 33
using SetIP 39, 43